Belimo VRD2 - TROX

VARYCONTROL 

Reference List 

Design and Areas of Application 

Installation 

Commissioning 

Maintenance 

Control Components 

Technical Leaflets

Reference list 

VARYCONTROL 

Agrippina Versicherung 

Köln/G 

Autostadt Hotel Ritz, Wolfsburg 

Wolfsburg/G 

Axel-Springer-Verlag 

Hamburg/G 

Bankhaus Lampe 

Düsseldorf/G 

Bausparkasse Schwäbisch Hall 

Schwäbisch Hall/G 

Bayer Leverkusen 

Leverkusen/G 

Bertelsmann 

Gütersloh/G 

BHW 

Hameln/G 

Biozentrum Frankfurt 

Frankfurt/G 

Boehringer Ingelheim 

Ingelheim/G 

Boehringer-Biberach 

Biberach/G 

Bosch-Stuttgart 

Stuttgart/G 

Bundesanstalt für Arbeit 

Nürnberg/G 

Bundeskanzleramt Berlin 

Berlin/G 

Bundesprüfanstalt für Arzneimittel 

Bonn/G 

City Carrè Magdeburg 

Magdeburg/G 

City Point Nürnberg 

Nürnberg/G 

Citybank Duisburg 

Duisburg/G 

CIV Europa-Parlament Brüssel 

Brüssel/B 

Commerzbank Frankfurt 

Frankfurt/G 

Condor-Versicherung 

Hamburg/G 

Daimler-Benz Düsseldorf 

Düsseldorf/G 

Daimler-Benz Germersheim 

Germersheim/G 

Daimler-Benz-Sindelfingen 

Sindelfingen/G 

Demirbank Esentepe 

Istanbul/T 

Deutsche Bank Düsseldorf 

Düsseldorf/G 

Deutsche Bank Mannheim 

Mannheim/G 

Deutsche Lufthansa 

Frankfurt/G 

DMC-Headquarter Degussa 

Hüls/G 

Erasmus-Universität, Rotterdam 

Rotterdam/NL 

Flughafen Bremen 

Bremen/G 

Flughafen Düsseldorf 

Düsseldorf/G 

Flughafen Frankfurt, Terminal Ost 

Frankfurt/G 

Flughafen Friedrichshafen 

Friedrichshafen/G 

Flughafen Hamburg 

Hamburg/G 

Flughafen München I und II 

München/G 

Flughafen Warschau 

Warschau/G 

Flughafen Zürich 

Zürich/S 

Gödeke-Freiburg 

Freiburg/G 

Heidelberger Druckmaschinen 

Heidelberg/G 

Henkel Z21 

Düsseldorf/G 

Hoechst-Frankfurt 

Frankfurt/G 

IBM-Heidelberg 

Heidelberg/G 

Immuno Wien 

Wien/Aus 

Industriekreditbank Düsseldorf 

Düsseldorf/G 

Investbank Berlin 

Berlin/G 

12/2001

Reference list 

VARYCONTROL 

KADEWE-Berlin 

Berlin/G 

Karstadt-Bielefeld 

Bielefeld/G 

Lufthansa-Bremen 

Bremen/G 

LZB Bremen 

Bremen/G 

LZB-Kiel 

Kiel/G 

Maintower Frankfurt 

Frankfurt/G 

Merck Darmstadt 

Darmstadt/G 

MTZ-Dresden 

Dresden/G 

NG-Bank Hannover 

Hannover/G 

Office-World-Bremen 

Bremen/G 

OPZ-Berlin 

Berlin/G 

Pharmazentrum-Oranienburg 

Oranienburg/G 

Provinzial-Versicherung Düsseldorf 

Düsseldorf/G 

Queens Tower, Amsterdam 

Amsterdam/NL 

Rheinbraun-Köln 

Köln/G 

Roche Penzberg 

Penzberg/G 

Schering Berlin 

Berlin/G 

Sony-Center Berlin 

Berlin/G 

Sophia-Krankenhaus Rotterdam 

Rotterdam/NL 

Sozial-Versicherungsbank 

Amsterdam 

Amsterdam/NL 

Stadhuis Den Haag 

Den Haag/NL 

Thomae-Biberach 

Biberach/G 

TKK-Hamburg 

Hamburg/G 

TU-Eindhoven 

Eindhoven/NL 

Universität Amsterdam 

Amsterdam/NL 

Universität Mainz 

Mainz/G 

Universitäts-Klinikum Leipzig 

Leipzig/G 

Urban-Medical-Center, Moskau 

Moskau/R 

Volksfürsorge 

Hamburg/G 

WDR-Köln 

Köln/G 

West-LB Münster 

Münster/G 

Zentralklinikum-Dresden 

Dresden/G 

Zentral-Klinikum-Köln 

Köln/G 

ZF-Friedrichshafen 

Friedrichshafen/G


1 

Contents 

Subject Page 

Volume Flow Control Terminal Units 

for VAV Systems 2 

Trox Scope of Supply 3 

Description of Function 4 

Single Duct System, 

Suply Air/Extract Air Slave Control 5 

Single Duct System with Reheat Coil 6 

Dual Duct System Type TVM 6 

Room Pressure Control 7 

Duct Pressure Control 7 

Explanation of Order Codes 8 

Nomenclature 

9 

Design changes reserved · All rights reserved · ® Gebrüder Trox GmbH (12/2001) · Leaflet No. E016NA1

TVZ · TVA 

TVM 

TVR 

TVRK 

TVJ/TVT 


2 

Volume Flow Control Terminal Units 

for VAV Systems 

The VARYCONTROL VAV terminal units are designed for 

variable air volume flow systems (VAV). The types are 

selected according to various project-specific criteria: 

Selection Criterion Terminal Unit Type 

System Supply air 

Type Single duct TVZ/TVS/TVR/TVJ/TVT 

Dual duct TVM 

Extract air TVA/TVR(K)/TVJ/TVT 

By acoustic 

criteria Very high TVZD + TS 

TVAD + TS 

TVMD + TS 

TVJD/TVTD + TX 

High criteria TVZ/TVA/TVM 

Low criteria TVR/TVJ/TVT 

Reduction in 

duct velocity TVZ/TVA/TVS/TVM 

Low installation height TVR/TVJ/TVT 

Chemical resistance 

Coating TVR-P1/TVJ-P1 

Stainless steel TVR-A2 

plastic TVRK 

Volume flow ranges 

15 to 1680 l/s TVZ/TVA/TVS 

10 to 1680 l/s TVR/TVRK 

40 to 615 l/s TVM 

45 to 10100 l/s TVJ/TVT 

The volume flow is controlled by a volume flow controller 

which uses pneumatic or electrical energy. These controllers 

and the associated measurement and activating 

elements are integral parts of the volume flow control terminal 

unit. The overall design of the air conditioning 

system results in the VAV terminal unit being the connecting 

element between the system and the room, with the 

following functions: 

• to adjust the volume flow within specified tolerances 

irrespective of duct pressure 

• as an auxiliary parameter for the room temperature 

controller, to maintain a constant room temperature. 

To achieve the correct control strategy, various tasks 

must be noted when planning volume flow control 

systems. The system designer, contractor, manufacturer 

of the control system and Trox must collaborate and the 

exchange of information is essential.


VAV System with Electronic or 

Pneumatic Volume Flow Control 

t 

VAV System with Digital Single Room Control 

t 

Room Temperature Controller 

Trox scope of supply 

Volume Flow Controller 

Volume Flow and 

Room Temperature 

Controller (DDC) 

Guarantee limit between Trox and system 

manufacturer or manufacturer of control 

components 

3 

Trox Scope of Supply 

The guarantee limits for VAV terminal units are set by the 

control function. The diagrams show the usual control 

systems used today. When a volume flow controller is 

used, this limit is defined by input and output signals. 

With combined room temperature and volume flow controllers, 

this limit passes through the controller. In these 

cases, the manufacturer of the VAV terminal unit guarantees 

to maintain the volume flow, and the supplier of the 

temperature controller guarantees the control of room 

temperature. 

The scope of supply for VARYCONTROL systems 

includes: 

• the VAV terminal unit with its flow and acoustic properties 

as given in the sales literature, and the control 

components ordered 

• installation, wiring and tubing connections of the control 

components mounted on the unit 

• volume flow adjustment and individual calibration test 

of unit and control components 

• guarantee for the above system according to the terms 

and conditions of order 

• technical documentation 

The following are not included: 

• fixing and sealing materials 

• water control valves and fittings for the reheat coils 

• transformers, unless specified and shown on order 

paperwork 

• pressure regulators to the operating pressure of the 

pneumatic controller of 1.3 bar 

The guarantee for the “room temperature” control system 

and customer overrides in principle the responsibility of 

the building control system/BMS company. Information 

on power consumption, connections etc. is given in the 

technical documentation from the control component 

manufacturer.

Room Temperature Control Circuit 

Set point 

Effect on room 

temperature 

Volume Flow Control Circuit 

3 2 

Control 

deviation 

Variable 

volume flow 

∆p w 

5 M 

4 

1 Volume flow controller 

2 Differential pressure sensor 

3 Control damper blade 

4 Differential pressure transducer 

5 Actuator 

6 Room temperature controller 

Room 

temperature 

controller 

Volume flow 

controller 

1 6 

Energy 

requirement 


4 

Description of Function 

“Room Temperature” Control Circuit 

In a VAV system, the volume flow control circuit is governed 

by a room temperature-dependent signal. The 

room temperature is measured with a temperature 

sensor. The room temperature controller compares the 

actual value with the set value and provides an output 

signal corresponding to the resulting energy requirement 

which is used as a set point signal for the volume flow 

controller. If the room temperature rises, the cooling 

effect is increased by increasing the volume flow (with 

cold supply air) and the room temperature held at its set 

point. 

Volume Flow Cascade Control Circuit 

The volume flow control has a closed control circuit: 

measurement – comparison – adjustment. 

As volume measurement accuracy is essential for quality, 

an optimised differential pressure sensor was developed 

for the Trox VARYCONTROL VAV terminal units. Differential 

pressures are measured at the inlet to the multi point 

flow grid. The particular arrangement of the measurement 

points gives an amplifica-tion of the dynamic pressure 

as a mean value. The differential pressure thus measured 

is a function of the volume flow and is converted 

into an electrical or pneumatic signal by a transducer. 

The volume flow controller determines the volume flow 

from the transducer signal. 

Depending on the control deviation between actual and 

set values, the control damper blade is adjusted by the 

actuator until the actual value and set point are equal 

(P or Pl control depending on controller type). The volume 

flow controller maintains a constant volume flow over the 

specified pressure range within controller-dependent 

tolerances. Duct pressure fluctuations cannot therefore 

have a disruptive effect on the room temperature control.


Single Duct with Supply Air/ 

Extract Air Dependent Control 

Extract 

air 

TVA 

TVR 

TVJ 

Constant Differential Control 

Extract air volume flow 

Ratio Control 

Extract air volume flow 

250 

l/s 

200 

150 

100 

50 

Differential ± 0 

TVR + 50 m 3 /h 

TVJ - 50 m 3 /h 

Ratio ± 0 

Ratio + 10 % 

Ratio - 10 % 

TVZ 

TVS 

TVR 

TVJ 

0 

0 50 100 150 200 l/s 250 

250 

l/s 

200 

150 

100 

50 

t 

Supply air volume flow (actual value) 

0 

0 50 100 150 200 l/s 250 

Supply air volume flow (actual value) 

Supply 

air 

5 

Single Duct System 

The supply air volume flow controller receives a control 

signal from the room temperature controller and holds 

the supply air volume flow, at the specified set value. The 

controller adjusts the air quantity between the specified 

V · min and V · max values. 

Suply Air/Extract Air Slave Control 

In individual rooms and closed office areas, the balance 

between supply air and extract air must be maintained to 

avoid whistling noises through gaps around doors etc., 

or making doors difficult to open and close. For this, the 

actual value of the supply air is monitored at the extract 

air volume flow controller. Thus the extract air volume 

flow in every operating situation follows the supply air. 

When designing the required volume flow differences, 

it must be ensured that the proposed controller can 

achieve the required constant differential or ratio control. 

When ordering VAV terminal units, the allocation by room 

numbers must be given. This allocation must be taken 

into account when the units are installed. VAV terminal 

units types TVA, TVR and TVJ are designed for use in 

normal air conditioning systems with extract air without 

high dust levels and without aggressive elements in the 

air. For extremely dusty extract air (grease, sticky dust), 

membrane pressure transducers must be provided and 

regular maintenance planned. For aggressive extract air, 

volume flow controllers of suitable materials are available. 

Order Example 

In accordance with sales leaflet and price list for ratio 

control: 

TVZ-R/160/B13/M2-30-250 l/s 

TVA -R/160/B13/S2-27-225 l/s

Single Duct System with Reheat Coil 

for LPHW Heating 

Order Example 

as per sales leaflet and price list: 

TVZ-R-1/200/B13/E2-200-400 l/s 

Dual Duct System 

t 

t 

TVZ 

TVS 

TVR 

TVJ 

TVM 

Order Example 


TVM-R-/200/B27/E2-200-400 l/s 

Supply air 

Warm 

Cold 


6 

Single Duct System with Reheat Coil 

The room temperature controller must have two outputs 

in sequence, heating and cooling. The cooling output is 

connected to the volume flow controller which controls 

the supply air volume flow between V · min and V · max. The 

heating output acts directly on the water valve actuator. 

The reheat coil selection can be carried out by the designer 

from Trox leaftets. Trox can also carry out the calculations 

if the following information is given in full: 

t e : air inlet temperature 

t a : air outlet temperature 

t wm : mean water temperature 

Unless specified otherwise, the heating volume is taken 

as V · min. The water control valve sizing is the responsibility 

of the system designer. 

Dual Duct System 

With a dual duct system, both heating and cooling air 

is available at all times for room temperature control. 

Cooling takes place due to the variable cold supply air 

volume flow with the warm air duct closed. In the heating 

mode, the warm air volume flow is increased as required. 

The room temperature controller is connected to the cold 

air volume flow controller. 

Control Diagram TVM 

Volume flow 

Room temperature 

Cold 

Warm 

Total volume flow


Room Pressure Control 

Extract 

air 

TVA 

TVR 

TVJ 

Order Example 


TVZ-R-1/160/B13/E2-25-250 l/s 

TVR/160/BG3/F2- -25 Pa, Extract Air 

Duct Pressure Control 

Order Example 


TVR/160/BH3/F2-110 Pa, Supply Air 

t 

TVZ 

TVS 

TVR 

TVJ 

Supply 

air 

7 


In sealed rooms, as a result of control deviations, with 

supply air/extract air slave control systems, unacceptably 

high room pressure differences can occur. It is therefore 

recommended that the room pressure be controlled. In 

the example shown, the room temperature is controlled 

via variable supply air (VAV). The room pressure is also 

controlled via the extract air. The room pressure controller 

acts directly on the actuator of the extract air 

damper. The membrane pressure transducer is connected 

to the room and a reference room (e.g. corridor) with 

measurement tubing. The specified maximum permitted 

tube length and installation position of the transducer 

must be observed. If an additional extract air volume flow 

controller is integrated, the extract air volume flow may 

be limited. This avoids extreme positions on the extract 

air damper (open or closed) when the doors are open or 

if there is any room leakage. This type of control is not 

possible with all controllers. 

The following combinations are possible: 

Supply air Extract air 

Constant/variable Room pressure 

positive or negative 

Room pressure Constant/variable 

positive or negative 

The proposed application and positive or negative pressure 

in Pa must be stated at the time of order. 


All single duct VAV terminal units can have duct pressure 

control. A controller with a membrane pressure transducer 

acts directly on the damper actuator. The existing 

differential pressure sensor can also be fitted with a 

transducer to measure the actual volume flow for secondary 

control. The order should state the application of 

supply or extract air and the pressure to be calibrated in 

Pa. The reference pressure connection of the duct 

pressure transducer remains open. The duct pressure 

take-off is connected by the customer. The measurement 

point must be selected according to flow and system 

related criteria. The measurement connection must be 

mounted at right angles, without burrs, and connected 

via tubing to the plus (high) or minus (low) connection of 

the transducer. The notes in the controller descriptions 

on maximum tubing lengths, installation position must be 

observed.

Explanation of Order Codes 

The control components (controller, transmitter, actuators) 

are identified by a three point code (see price list). 

Code Make of 

control 

components 

B 

L 

H 

C 

P 

Belimo 

Sauter, pneumatic Sauter, elektronic Honeywell Siemens-Landis&Staefa 

Volume flow 

device 

Type … 

TVZ/TVA/TVS/TVR/ 

TVRK/TVJ/TVT 


TVRK/TVJ/TVT 

TVM 


TVRK/TVJ/TVT 


TVRK/TVJ/TVT 


TVRK/TVJ/TVT 

TVM 


TVRK/TVJ/TVT 

TVM 


TVRK/TVJ/TVT 

TVM 


TVRK/TVJ/TVT 

TVM 

1) for TVT only; depending of necessary torque, selected by Trox 

Code Controller/Transmitter 

Type … 

1 

B 

G 

J 

H 

C 

2 

E 

F 

N 

P 

L 

Y 

M 

M 

N 

Q 

R 

B 

C 

J 

Q 

R 

D 

S 

A 

B 

D 

E 

N 

P 

R 

S 

U 

V 

X 

Y 

1 

2 

3 


VRD2 

VRP + VFP 300 

VRP-STP + VFP100 



NMV-D2 

2 x VRD2 

2 x VRP + 2 x VFP300 

2 x NMV-D2 

GLB181.1E/3 

ASV181.1/E 

PRVU 

2 x GLB181.1E/3 

2 x PRVU 

W7751H2009 

W7751F2003 

2 x W7751H2009 

2 x W7751F2003 

RLE150F003 

RLE150F013 

RLE150F013 + …F100 

EYE205 

EYE206 

RLE150F003 + RLE150F001 

2 x EYE205 

RLP10, NO, PN21 


RLP10, NZ, PN21 






RLP100 (NO, PN21) + RLP100 

RLP100 (NZ, PN21) + RLP100 

RLP100 (NO, PN21) + RLP100 

RLP100 (NZ, PN21) + RLP100 

2 x RLP10 (NO, PN21) 

2 x RLP10, (NZ, PN21) 

1 x RLP100F918 

(NZ/NO, 2 x PN21) 

8 

This table shows the connections between code numbers 

and technical basic functions. 

Application Code Actuator 

Type … 

Standard VAV-Control 

VAV-Control for polluted air 

Room- or duct pressure control 


Standard dual duct control 

VAV-Control for polluted air 



Standard VAV-Control, 

for higher torque 

resp. Spring return function 


digital communication 




digital communication, LON-Bus 








Room pressure/volume flow 

cascade 




Standard dual duct control, 




lower volume flow rates 

Volume flow/room pressure 

cascade 




1 

3 

B 

D 

5 

7 

8 

C 

0 

A 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

A 

5 

0 

D 

0 

5 

0 

6 

2 

6 

4 

1 

4 

1) 

1) 

1) 

1) 

1) 

1) 

1) 

SM24-V 

NM24-V 

AF24-V 

GM24-V 

VAV-Compact 

2 x NM24-V 

2 x AF24-V 

(spring return function) 

2 x VAV-Compact 

Compact controller 

GBB131.1E 

GEB131.1E 

GIB131.1E 

GMA131.1E 


GCA131.1E 


GLB131.1E 

GBB131.1E 

GLB131.1E 

2 x compact controller 

2 x GLB131.1E 

VAV compact controller 

ML6174E2008 

2 x compact controller 

2 x ML6174E2008 

ASM113F902 

SA1.12 

2 x ASM113F902 

B555DC2 

2 x B555DC2


Nomenclature 

TVZ VAV terminal box with integrated silencer, 

for supply air 

TVA VAV terminal box with integrated silencer, 

for extract air 

TVR VAV terminal box with integrated silencer, 

for supply and extract air 

9 

TVJ VAV terminal box, casing rectangular 

TVT VAV controller, casing rectangular, control 

damper leakage complies with DIN 1946, part 4 

TVM VAV dual duct etrminal box 

...-D Additional acoustic cladding

Installation 

1 

Contents 

Subject Page 

Safety Instructions 2 

Delivery and Storage 3 

Transport on Site 3 

Reheat Coil Connections 4 

Wiring and Tubing Connections 4 

Secondary Silencer 4 

Installation TVJ/TVT 5 


Before installing the VAV terminal 

units, read and observe these 

installation instructions! 

Proper Application 

The VAV terminal units are suitable for use in ventilation 

and air conditioning systems. Particular conditions can 

restrict the functioning capacity and must be taken into 

account during the design stage: 

• If the air is very dusty or contains fluff or sticky particles, 

e.g. extract air, units with membrane pressure 

transducers must be used. Access to the units for 

maintenance must be allowed. 

• For aggressive air, only volume flow control units made 

of plastic materials should be used after extensive 

tests for suitability. 

• Galvanised sheet steel units must not be installed in 

contaminated environments (e.g. acetic acid). 

• For hazardous areas, only use units with explosionproof 

electrical components. 

• For protected exterior areas, only use units with membrane 

pressure transducers. Larger volume flow tolerances 

occur due to the wider temperature range. 

2 

Safety Instructions 

Installation 

• Installation and wiring should only be carried out by 

specialists. 

• During installation, wiring and commissioning, the normal 

rules of site working, in particular the safety and 

accident prevention regulations, must be observed. 

• Because of the risk of injury from edges and burrs, 

carry and install units only while wearing gloves. 

• Mount devices properly and secure fixings with locking 

nuts. Suspension points must only carry the weight of 

the unit. Adjacent components and connecting ducts 

must be supported separately. 

Wiring the Control Components 

• The electrical connection must be made by an electrical 

engineer with observation of all safety measures. 

• Safety transformers must be used (EN 60742). 

• The following regulations and conditions must be 

observed: 

National IEE regulations 

Health and Safety directives 

Wiring instructions and circuit diagrams from 

the manufacturer of the control components. 

Residual Risks 

• Under extremely rare and unfavourable conditions, 

despite observation of the regulations listed, faults can 

occur in the controller due to electromagnetic fields. 

These can usually be remedied by screening or relocating 

the controller. 

• Foreseeable damage which could occur due to the 

failure of control components must be prevented in 

critical cases by corresponding measures (e.g. pressure 

relief openings in sealed rooms).

Installation 

TVZ . TVA Delivery and Storage 

5 

TVR 

4 

6 

2 

2 

1 Trox differential pressure sensor 

2 Control components with actuator 

3 Label with arrow showing air flow direction 

4 Circular connection duct 

5 Rectangular connection duct 

6 Suspension rods (supplied by customer) 

3 

3 

1 

4 

1 4 

3 

Several devices are supplied on each pallet, held by 

bands against sliding. TVR’s are packed in non-returnable 

containers. 

• Immediately after delivery, check units for completeness 

and transport damage. If delivery is incomplete or 

if transport damage has occured, inform the carriers 

and Trox immediately. 

• Do not expose the units (even when packed) to the 

direct effect of weather. Protect from water, direct sunlight 

and dirt. 

• Do not store in temperatures above 50 °C. 

Transport on Site 

Units should not be carried by the control components 

but only by the terminal unit edges. 

• The differential pressure sensor in the spigot connection 

is a measuring instrument which is extremely 

important for correct functioning, and must be handled 

with particular care. Do not therefore pull on the aluminium 

tubes of the sensors. 

Installation Point 

• Select the installation point such that the control components 

and maintenance openings remain accessible. 

• Do not confuse supply and extract air units. Note the 

air flow direction arrow on the unit label. 

• Do not confuse the units for master and slave control 

units (e.g. supply and extract air). 

• Units with membrane pressure transducers should be 

mounted in the position shown by the label. Consult 

Trox before fitting in other positions or moving the 

pressure transducer. 

• For installation before and after bends, dampers or 

other flow distortion elements, note that an increase in 

flow tolerance and noise level can result.

Reheat Coil Connections Fixing 

4 

Secondary Silencer Connections 

1 Rectangular end wall of terminal box 

2 Inser nut M8 

3 Reheat coil 

4 Water flow and return 

5 Additional decondary silencer TS 

3 

1 

2 5 

4 

Installation 

TVZ/TVS/TVA/TVM boxes have 10.5 mm dia. mounting 

holes on the top edge to take threaded drop rods up to 

10 mm in diameter. The circular spigots on all boxes fit 

into circular ducts to DIN 24145 and 24146. The rectangular 

end wall on the boxes has 4 M 8 inserts with 

centres that match 30 mm (TVS 20 mm) slide on frames 

or suitably prepared angle flanges. The protective cardboard 

can be used as a drilling template for duct flanges. 

TVJ/TVT has 4 corner flange holes 13 mm dia. on both 

mounting flanges. 

Duct Connections 

• Before connecting the ducts, check the inside of the 

unit for damage and any loose parts, and check the 

connecting ducts for contamination. 

• Seal the duct connections well with conventional 

sealing materials. 

• Because of the plastic components in the immediate 

vicinity of the connector, heat shrink tape should be 

used with care. 

Wiring and Tubing Connections 

Control components mounted on the unit are connected 

together by cables and tubing in the factory. Each unit is 

calibrated individually on an air flow test rig. The complete 

function and direction of rotation of the actuators/ 

controller is tested. 

• Customer connections should be carried out carefully 

and tested, taking into account the technical literature 

issued and the project specification. 

Reheat Coils 

Units with reheat coils are supplied fully mounted. The 

reheat coil fins are covered by a protective steel plate. 

Remove the protective plate before connecting to 

the duct. The customer must connect the flow and return 

pipe connections (for 1, 2 and 4 row coils, 1 off each). 

Air venting and water draining/isolation facilities must be 

provided. 

Secondary Silencer TS 

The secondary silencers are supplied separately and 

must be mounted at the point of installation directly onto 

the unit or reheat coil. 

• Fix secondary silencer to the terminal unit end wall or 

reheat coil using 4 x M 8 bolts.

Installation 

TVJ with TX TVJ/TVT with Silencer TX 

1 TVJ/TVT 

2 Silencer TX 

1 2 1 

Acoustic media 

1 

Acoustic media 

TVJ/TVJD, H = 100 1) mm, with TX 

Acoustic media at top Acoustic media on bottom 

2 

5 

For aerodynamic and acoustic reasons, direct connection 

of TVJ control units and TX silencers is not recommended. 

To achieve the technical data as specified, a 

duct section must be installed between the damper and 

the silencer. The units are supplied separately and must 

be mounted by the customer as shown. TX and the duct 

section both have 4 corner flange holes for bolting to the 

TVJ/TVT. 

Unit with 1001) mm Height 

For this height, to achieve the aerodynamic data given in 

the sales leaflet, the TX must be installed as shown. Note 

the unit labels relating to the installation position. 

1) Also valid for the former height 107 mm

Commissioning 

1 

Contents 

Subject Page 

Function Test 2 

C-Values 3 

Transducer Curve 3 

Volume Flow Adjustment 3 

TVRK 4 


Disengaging the Drive Function Test 

1 Button for disengaging the drive 

2 Control damper shaft with position indicator 

Control Damper Actuator 

Most electric actuators can be adjusted by hand. The 

drive is disengaged via a button so that the blade shaft 

can be turned. For larger sizes and greater pressure 

differentials, high torque loadings occur. 

• To avoid injury, only move the damper shaft using 

pliers. 

A slot in the damper shaft indicates the position of the 

blade. The direction of rotation can be reversed with 

most electric actuators. However, the rotation is correctly 

set in the Trox works. If the actuator runs in one direction 

only, changing the direction of rotation will show whether 

there is a fault with the actuator. If, after changing direction, 

the drive rotates in the other direction, there is a 

wiring fault or the controller is faulty. 

Dampers which are permanently open or closed may 

have the following faults in addition to wiring faults: 

Open 

• Static differential pressure too low 

• No air flow (fan stopped, fire damper closed) 

Closed 

• Override position control in action 

• (e.g. window switch/shut off) 

1 

2 

2 

Commissioning 

Safety notes 

• Commissioning should only be carried out by specialists. 

• To ensure complete functioning, check the customer 

connections carefully before commissioning. 

• The control damper blade may only be manually 

adjusted using pliers when the actuator drive has been 

disconnected. 

The function of the volume flow control has been tested 

in the Trox works. If all customer connections have been 

correctly made, the system is ready for operation. 

For function testing and commissioning: 

• All control components must be wired and the 

wiring/tubing connections tested. 

• The duct system to the VAV terminal unit must be 

complete. 

• The fans must be running. 

• The supply voltage or compressed air must be connected. 

The basic procedure for function testing during commissioning 

is described below. Further details are given in 

the VARYCONTROL Product Information under the heading 

“Control Components” and the documentation from 

the control component manufacturer. 

Volume Flow Controllers and Transducers 

The volume flow controllers can only be site tested in 

conjunction with transducers and actuators. It must be 

checked that the supply voltage or operating pressure is 

present at the terminal unit. 

The controller/transducer function unit is tested by adjusting 

the actuator position by hand or through the controller. 

The transducer signal must change position in 

accordance with the setting. 

To test the actuator, ensure that the controller opens and 

closes the damper blade. Further details are given in the 

information for the controller type concerned. External 

control functions are tested as specified by the controller 

manufacturer.

Commissioning 

C-Values TVZ, TVS, TVR, TVM and TVA Transducer Curve 

Size TVZ/TVR/TVS TVM-cold TVM-tot. TVA 

10 6.11) 12 9.7 9.7 16.8 9.0 

16 15.9 15.9 29.1 15.2 

20 25.5 25.5 44 24.2 

25 39 39 61 38 

31 65 63 

40 106 103 

1) TVR only 

C-Values TVJ/TVT 

B x H 

mm 

C 

200 x 100 14.8 

300 x 100 21.2 

400 x 100 28.8 

500 x 100 35 

600 x 100 44 

200 x 200 30 

300 x 200 45 

400 x 200 60 

500 x 200 75 

600 x 200 90 

700 x 200 107 

800 x 200 120 

300 x 300 75 

400 x 300 100 

500 x 300 137 

600 x 300 147 

700 x 300 174 

800 x 300 207 

900 x 300 228 

1000 x 300 254 

B x H 

mm 

C 

400 x 400 146 

500 x 400 183 

600 x 400 212 

700 x 400 239 

800 x 400 281 

900 x 400 320 

1000 x 400 359 

500 x 500 207 

600 x 500 234 

700 x 500 284 

800 x 500 318 

900 x 500 361 

1000 x 500 409 

600 x 600 297 

700 x 600 344 

800 x 600 396 

900 x 600 461 

1000 x 600 508 

Measuring the Effectiv Pressure ∆p e 

1 

1 Remove test point cap and replace after 

measurement 

2 Manometer 

2 

B x H 

mm 

C 

700 x 700 415 

800 x 700 469 

900 x 700 535 

1000 x 700 597 

800 x 800 543 

900 x 800 636 

1000 x 800 681 

900 x 900 720 

1000 x 900 786 

1000 x 1000 904 

3 

The transducers are calibrated in the Trox works such 

that the transducer output signal shown on the curve 

agrees with the actual volume flows. This setting is 

sealed. If the transducers are tested, the differential 

pressure must be measured at the differential pressure 

sensor. If the measuring lines contain T-pieces, a manometer 

can be connected. If the transducer has no T-piece 

at the effectiv pressure sensor, parallel measurement is 

not possible. In this case, the actuator must be locked in 

position (release wiring, program manual operation etc). 

After measuring the transducer output voltage, the tubes 

are carefully removed from the transducer connections 

and the effectiv pressure measured. The volume flow is 

calculated according to the formula below. 

V · l/s = C . ∆p e 

V · m 3 /h =C . ∆p e . 3.6 

in l/s 

in m 3/h 

V · 

: volume flow 

�pe : measured effectiv pressure in Pa 

C : constant for air density � = 1.2 kg/m3 The accuracy for the measurement is ± 7 % (for TVM total 

± 12 %). 

If the minimum requirements given in the leaflets for the 

flow conditions are not observed, this tolerance will be 

greater. 

Volume Flow Adjustment 

The volume flow limit value can be changed, depending 

on controller type, by adjusting setting knobs with percentage 

scales, manual operation devices or by computer. 

For analogue controllers, the adjustment accuracy 

can be increased if the transducer signal is measured 

and the volume flow set according to the voltage curve. 

Ensure that the controller will actually control at 

V · min or V · max and that the system pressure is adequate. 

The DDC controller parameters are reprogrammed using 

a laptop P.C. or through the network via the central computer.

TVRK Volume Flow Controller and Transducer 

C-Values TVRK 

Size 

110 6.5 

C-Value 

Star shaped grid Flow grid 

125 9.7 8.6 

160 15.8 15.1 

200 27 24.3 

250 41 38 

315 73 62 

400 116 103 1) 

1) From January 1997 no longer included in the delivery programme 

Effective Pressure Sensors 

Star shaped grid Flow grid 

Delivered until 

end of 

1995, approx. 

Delivered from 

beginning of 

1996, approx. 

4 

The TVRK plastic controllers have been developed for 

the use in air-conditioning systems, where the air contains 

agressive media. For this reason only membrane 

pressure transducers are used. 

Membrane pressure transducers are depending on position 

(installation position to be indicated when ordering). 

The intended installation position will be considered at 

adjustment in the factory and is marked with an arrow. 

Should another installation position be requested at site, 

the zero point adjustment of the membrane pressure 

transducer as per individual product information has 

again to be carried out be the customer. 

Transducer Curve 

The differential (effective) pressure can be measured 

direct at the differential pressure sensor in order to check 

the membrane pressure transducer. For this purpose a 

pressure gauge (manometer) is connected to the measuring 

lines. The pressure gauge (manometer) can also be 

connected parallely to the membrane pressure transducer. 

The volume flow is calculated according to the following 

formulae: 

‡ = C . �p e 

‡ = C . �p e . 3.6 

Commissioning 

in l/s 

in m 3/h 

V · 

: Volume flow 

�pe : Measured effective pressure in Pa 

C : Constant for air density � = 1.2 kg/m3 The accuracy for the measurement is ± 7 %. 

If the minimum requirements given in the leaflets for the 

flow conditions are not observed, this tolerance will be 

greater.

Maintenance 

1 

Contents 

Subject Page 

Maintenance 2 

Blade Position Indicator 2 

Replacement of Control Components 2 


Removing tubes Maintenance 

1 Special tool for removing tubing 

Blade Position Indicator 

5 4 3 2 

1 VAV terminal unit 

2 Actuator 

3 Shaft with position indicator 

Measuring Equipment Required: 

4 Rotation angle limiter 

5 Control damper blade 

Electronic control Pneumatic control 

• Digital voltmeter • Pressure gauge, 0 to 1.5 bar 

• Manometer, 0 to 1000 Pa • Manometer, 0 to 1000 Pa 

• Service unit 

DDC control 

• Service computer 

• Digital voltmeter 

• Manometer, 0 to 1000 Pa 

1 

1 

2 

Maintenance 

Safety Note 

• Maintenance should only be carried out by specialists! 

The control damper mechanism on the VAV terminal unit 

is maintenance-free. To ensure perfect functioning of 

the entire system, function tests should be carried out as 

part of the regular system maintenance. 

The following criteria should be used: 

1. Does the room temperature controller function? 

2. Does the volume flow controller function? 

3. Does the actuator turn in both directions? 

4. Does the transducer output signal vary according to 

the actuator movements? 

5. Do the override controls such as shut off function? 

6. Are the tubing connections airtight? 

Further details on fault diagnosis are given in the information 

on each controller type. 

Replacement of Control Components 

If faulty control components have to be replaced, the 

following principles must be observed: 

• Spare parts must comply with the technical requirements 

of the manufacturer. 

Only use original spare parts. 

• Disconnect supply voltage 24 volts or operating pressure. 

• Mark wiring/tubing connections before releasing. 

• Carefully remove pneumatic tubing without pulling. 

• Replace component and all connections. 

When replacing controllers and transducers, they must 

be adjusted to suit the unit size. Therefore electronic 

and pneumatic components are preset in the Trox works. 

Digital controllers can be set up by the customer. 

When changing actuators, note the following: 

• Mechanical rotation angle limiters on the new actuator 

should be set as the existing unit. A slot in the control 

damper shaft shows the position of the blade. 

• Direction of rotation should be set as before (switch or 

plug setting).

Belimo VRD2 

1 

Contents 

Subject Page 

Area of Application 2 


Volume Flow Control 4 

Volume Flow Adjustment on Site 5 

Volume Flow Ranges, Single Duct Units 6 

Single Duct Units, Order Code, Examples 7 

Dual Duct Units Series TVM 8 

Terminal Connections 9 

Override Controls 10 

Volume Flow Control of TVM Units 11 

Function Test, Commissioning 12 

Design changes reserved · All rights reserved · ® Gebrüder Trox GmbH (12/2001) · Leaflet No. E016NL0



Tube connection for transducer 

V · min-adjustment knob (0 to 80 % of V · max) 

V · max-adjustment knob (30 to 100 % of V · Nenn) 

Reference value potentiometer 

Connection terminals 

Actuator connection cable 

VAV Control 


controller, DDCoutstation, 

etc. 

Command variable 


Override control 

Actual value 

Window 

switch, etc. 

Slave, 

monitoring, 

etc. 

2 


Area of Application 

The VRD2 electronic volume flow controller from Belimo 

is designed for use in VAV systems. A dynamic differential 

pressure transducer and electronic controller are 

combined in one housing. 

The principle requirements for variable volume flow control 

are a suitable room temperature controller or a DDC 

outstation or similar. The output signal from this controller 

serves as a command variable for the VRD2. 

Switches or relays are used for override control. The 

actual value of the volume flow is monitored as a standard 

linear, electrical signal. This signal can be used for 

example to control a slave unit in the extract air duct. The 

voltage range for the actual and control value is standardised 

between 2 and 10 VDC. Using the adjuster ZEV, the 

customer can change from 0 to 10 VDC. 

The VRD2 has adjustment knobs for setting V · min and 

V · max. All the controller parameters are set by Trox and the 

unit is supplied with the knobs sealed. No adjustment is 

necessary by the customer. As soon as the supply voltage 

and the room temperature controller have been connected, 

the volume flow control unit is ready for use. Any 

volume flow changes which may be necessary to the 

VRD2 can easily be carried out by the customer. 

For parallel operation, several VRD2 controllers can be 

connected up to one room temperature controller. Supply 

air/extract air slave control is possible. 

The VRD2 is capable of communication through the PP 

connection (terminal 5). With the aid of the Belimo adjuster 

ZEV, the parameter settings can be read and the 

voltage ranges changed. 

Standard filtration in air conditioning systems allows the 

use of the VRD2 in the supply air without dust protection 

filters. Since a small volume flow is passed through the 

transducer in order to monitor the volume flow, the following 

must be noted: 

• With heavy dust in the room, suitable extract air 

filters must be provided. 

• If the air is contaminated with fluff or sticky particles 

or contains aggressive media, the VRD2 

should not be used.


Characteristic of Actual Value Signal Description of Function 

V · nom 

(100 %) 

Volume flow 

V · min pub. 

A 2 to 10 VDC (standard) 

V · actual = V · nom 

U 5 - 2 

8 

B 0 to 10 VDC 

V · actual = V · nom 

Adjustment 

range 

0 

0 2 Actual value signal U5 10 VDC 

U 5 

10 

Characteristic of Volume Flow Control Variable 

Volume flow 

V · max 

V · min 

A 2 to 10 VDC (standard) 

V · set = U3 - 2 

(V 

8 

· max -V · min) + V · min 

V · nom 

(100 %) 

V · min pub. 

0 

0 2 Control signal U3 10 VDC 

B 0 to 10 VDC 

V · set = U 3 

10 

(V · max -V · min) + V · min 

3 

The volume flow is measured on the dynamic differential 

pressure principle. The effective pressure ∆p w of the 

differential pressure sensor in the terminal unit allows the 

detection of a partial volume flow passing trough the 

transducer. This partial volume flow which is proportional 

to the total volume flow is measured, temperature compensated 

and linearised with two temperature-dependent 

resistors. 

The measurement range is set to suit the unit size during 

factory calibration, so that 10 VDC always corresponds 

to the unit nominal volume flow rate (V · nom). 

The signal is processed by a microprocessor. The actual 

volume flow is available as a linear voltage signal U 5. 

The required volume flow is set by the room temperature 

controller via the control signal within the limits of V · min 

and V · max. 

It is possible to select either 2 to 10 VDC (standard) or 

0 to 10 VDC as the voltage range for signal transmission. 

This facilitates an adjustment to the working ranges 

of different room temperature controllers or DDC outstations. 

The set volume flow can be overridden using 

switched controls. 

The VRD2 determines the required volume flow in 

accordance with the characteristic shown and compares 

this with the actual value. The damper actuator is controlled 

according to the deviation. 

The Belimo volume flow controller VRD2 can only operate 

with the matched Belimo actuators which are optimised 

for volume flow control. It is not possible to connect 

other 3-point or 0 to 10 VDC actuators.

Pressure Independent Control Characteristic 

Pressure differential 

1000 

Pa 

800 

600 

400 

200 

% of V 

Volume flow 

· 20 40 60 80 100 

nom 

V · max-set value = V · nom 

V · min-set value = V· min 

V · max 

V · max M 

V · min M 

V · max-set value = 

= 

V · max S 

V · max M 

V · max 

V · max S 

V · min S 

. 100 % 

. 100 % 

. V· nom M 

V · nom S 

. 100 % 

4 

Volume Flow Control 

The volume flow controller works independently of 

the duct pressure, i. e. pressure fluctuations cause no 

changes to volume flow. 

To prevent the volume flow control becoming unstable, a 

dead zone is allowed within which the damper does not 

move. This dead zone and the accuracy of site measurements 

lead to volume flow deviation ∆V · shown opposite. 

If the conditions given in the sales brochure (static minimum 

pressure differential, inlet flow conditions etc.) are 

not observed, greater deviations must be expected. 

V · max Setting 

The V · max value corresponds to the volume flow which is 

set with a 10 VDC control signal or V · max override control. 

The setting range is from 30 to 100 %. The percentage 

figures relate to V · nom. 

V · min Setting 


The V · min value corresponds to the volume flow which is 

set with a 0 V (alternatively 2 VDC) control signal or V · min 

override control. 

V · min may be set between 0 and 80 % of V · max The percentage 

figures relate to the V · max volume flow setting. If 

V · min is set at 0 %, the damper will be moved to the 

CLOSED position (leakage depends on the type of unit) 

with a control signal of 0 V (alternatively 2 VDC). 

Slave Control 

The VRD2 only provides for ratio control, i.e. the supply 

and extract air must be in the same ratio under all 

operating conditions. 

The volume flow ratio is set using the V · max adjustment 

knob on the slave controller, according to the formula 

shown opposite. 

Where the volume flows are the same and the units of 

equal size, the setting will be 100 %. The setting range is 

from 30 to 100 %. 

If V · max set value > 100 %, the master and slave functions 

must be reversed. As a rule, the V · min adjustment knob on 

the slave is set to 0 %.


VRD2 Adjustment Knobs 

Formula for V · max 

ZEV Adjuster 

V · min adjustment knob 

V · max adjustment knob 


Important: 

The reference value potentiometer 

must not be adjusted. 

2 to 10 VDC (standard) 

U 5 = V· max 

V · nom 

Formula for V · min 

. 8V + 2V 

2 to 10 VDC (standard) 

U 5 = V· min 

V · nom 

0 to 10 VDC 

U 5 = V· max 

V · nom 

0 to 10 VDC 

. 8V + 2V U5 = V· min 

V · nom 

. 10 V 

. 10 V 

Operating mode 

selector knob 

5 

Volume Flow Adjustment on Site 


The set volume flow limit values can be adjusted on site 

using the V · min and V · max adjustment knobs on the VRD2. 

Calculations are based on the formulae shown on page 4. 

Adjustment Procedure 

• First set V · max and then V· min . 

• If the ratio of V · max to V· min is to remain constant (e.g. 

V · min = 50 % of V· max ), only the V· max adjustment knob 

must be moved. 

• Moving the V · min adjustment knob will have no effect on 

the V · max value. 

• If V · max is to be altered and V· min to remain unchanged, 

V · max , must be reset first, followed by V· min . 

Calculating the Volume Flow 

Using the Actual Value Signal U5 The accuracy of the setting can be increased if the 

actual value signal U5 is also measured with the system 

switched on (note the voltage range 0/10 V or 2/10 V). 

As a rule, the controller must have been connected to the 

operating voltage for at least 15 minutes before measurements 

begin. 

• Calculate the required value for U5 at V · max 

• Disconnect all the wires from the terminal block, except 

for terminals 1 and 2 

• Insert a link between terminals 2 and 7 

• Move the V · max adjustment knob until the voltage U5 dem corresponds to the calculated value (wait approx. 

2 minutes after the adjustment, then read the voltage) 

• Remove the link between 2 and 7 

• Calculate the voltage for U5 at V · min 

• Proceed with the V · min setting as for V · max 

• Replace the original wiring 

Using the ZEV to Adjust the Voltage Range 

The VRD2 is factory-set to the required voltage range 

(the standard range is 2 to 10 VDC). The voltage range 

can only be altered by the customer using the Belimo 

adjuster ZEV. If the ZEV operating mode selector knob is 

set to const. operating mode, the VRD2 will automatically 

revert to 2 to 10 VDC mode.

Volume Flow Ranges TVZ, TVA, TVR, TVS 

Size 

V · min- 

V 

unit 

· to 

to from min- 

V to from 

unit 

· l/s m 

nom 

3 /h 

V 

1) 1) 

· V max 

· min 

V · min 

Volume Flow Ranges TVJ/TVT 

V · min-unit 1) 

V · max 

to 

V · nom 

1002) 10 75 30 95 36 270 108 342 

125 15 120 45 150 54 432 162 540 

160 25 200 75 250 90 720 270 900 

200 40 325 120 405 144 1170 432 1458 

250 60 490 185 615 216 1764 666 2214 

315 105 820 310 1025 378 2952 1116 3690 

400 170 1345 505 1680 612 4842 1818 6048 

B x H 

mm 

l/s m 3 /h 

to from 

200 x 100 45 170 65 215 162 612 234 774 

300 x 100 65 255 95 320 234 918 342 1152 

400 x 100 85 340 130 425 306 1224 468 1530 

500 x 100 105 430 160 535 378 1548 576 1926 

600 x 100 130 520 195 650 468 1872 702 2340 

200 x 200 85 330 125 415 306 1188 450 1494 

300 x 200 125 495 185 620 450 1782 666 2232 

400 x 200 165 660 250 825 594 2376 900 2970 

500 x 200 205 830 310 1035 738 2988 1116 3726 

600 x 200 250 1000 375 1250 900 3600 1350 4500 

700 x 200 290 1160 435 1450 1044 4176 1566 5220 

800 x 200 330 1320 495 1650 1188 4752 1782 5940 

300 x 300 185 735 275 920 666 2646 990 3312 

400 x 300 245 985 370 1230 882 3546 1332 4428 

500 x 300 305 1230 460 1535 1098 4428 1656 5526 

600 x 300 370 1480 555 1850 1332 5328 1998 6660 

700 x 300 430 1720 645 2150 1548 6192 2322 7740 

800 x 300 490 1960 735 2450 1764 7056 2646 8820 

900 x 300 555 2215 830 2770 1998 7974 2988 9972 

1000 x 300 620 2480 930 3100 2232 8928 3348 11160 

400 x 400 325 1305 490 1630 1170 4698 1764 5868 

500 x 400 410 1630 610 2040 1476 5868 2196 7344 

600 x 400 490 1960 735 2450 1764 7056 2646 8820 

700 x 400 570 2280 855 2850 2052 8208 3078 10260 

800 x 400 650 2600 975 3250 2340 9360 3510 11700 

900 x 400 735 2935 1100 3670 2646 10566 3960 13212 

1000 x 400 820 3280 1230 4100 2952 11808 4428 14760 

500 x 500 510 2030 760 2540 1836 7308 2736 9144 

600 x 500 610 2440 915 3050 2196 8784 3294 10980 

700 x 500 710 2840 1065 3550 2556 10224 3834 12780 

800 x 500 810 3240 1215 4050 2916 11664 4374 14580 

900 x 500 915 3655 1370 4570 3294 13158 4932 16452 

1000 x 500 1020 4080 1530 5100 3672 14688 5508 18360 

600 x 600 730 2920 1095 3650 2628 10512 3942 13140 

700 x 600 850 3400 1275 4250 3060 12240 4590 15300 

800 x 600 970 3880 1455 4850 3492 13968 5238 17460 

900 x 600 1100 4400 1650 5500 3960 15840 5940 19800 

1000 x 600 1220 4880 1830 6100 4392 17568 6588 21960 

700 x 700 990 3960 1485 4950 3564 14256 5346 17820 

800 x 700 1140 4560 1710 5700 4104 16416 6156 20520 

900 x 700 1280 5120 1920 6400 4608 18432 6912 23040 

1000 x 700 1420 5680 2130 7100 5112 20448 7668 25560 

800 x 800 1300 5200 1950 6500 4680 18720 7020 23400 

900 x 800 1460 5840 2190 7300 5256 21024 7884 26280 

1000 x 800 1620 6480 2430 8100 5832 23328 8748 29160 

900 x 900 1640 6560 2460 8200 5904 23616 8856 29520 

1000 x 900 1820 7280 2730 9100 6552 26208 9828 32760 

1000 x 1000 2020 8080 3030 10100 7272 29088 10908 36360 

1) V · min = 0 is also possible 2) Only TVR 

V · min V · max V · min V · max 

6 

to V · nom 



to from to V · nom


Volume Flow Control Tolerances 1) 

Volume flow 

as % of V · nom 

100 5 5 

80 5 5 

60 7 7 

40 7 8 

20 9 14 

10 20 >14 

20 >14 

1) Percentage figures based on V · actual 

∆V · in ± % 

TVZ, TVA, TVR, TVS TVJ/TVT 

7 

Single Duct Units 

Order Code / Examples 

The available options are given in the current price list. 

TVZ-R / 160 / 00 / B13 / E2 - 50 - 240 l/s 

TVR / 160 / 00 / B13 / M2 - 50 - 240 l/s 

TVA-R / 160 / 00 / B13 / S2 - 50 - 240 l/s 

Operating Mode Voltage Range 

E Individual 

M Master 

S Slave 

F Constant 

Volume Flow Parameters 

Operating 

Mode 

E2; E0 

M2; M0 

S2; S0 

F2; F0 

Factory Setting 

V · min 

2 = Voltage range 2 to 10 VDC 

(standard range) 


V · min adjustment knob set at required V· min 

V · max adjustment knob set at required V· max 

V · min adjustment knob set at 0 % 

V · max adjustment knob set at volume flow 

ratio to the master controller 

V · � 80 % of V · nom 

V · min adjustment knob set at required 

constant volume flow 

V · max adjustment knob set at 100 % (V· nom ) 

V · � 80 % of V · nom 

V · min adjustment knob set at 0 % 

V · max adjustment knob set at required 


Link between terminal 2 and 4 

V · max

Volume Flow Ranges TVM 

Size V · min - 

unit 

V · min- V 

unit 

· l/s m 

nom 

3/h 

125 45 150 162 540 

160 75 250 270 900 

200 120 405 432 1458 

250 185 615 666 2214 

Volume Flow Control Tolerances TVM 1) 

Volume flow 


TVM cold 


∆V · in ± % 

V · nom 

TVM total 

100 5 7 

80 5 10 

60 5 12 

40 7 15 

30 8 17 

20 9 - 

10 20 - 

20 - 

8 

Dual Duct Units 



TVM-R / 160 / B27 / E2 - 50 - 240 l/s 

TVM-R / 160 / B27 / F2 - 400 l/s 


E Individual 

M Master 

F Constant 


Operating 

Mode Cold Duct 

Controller 

E2 

E0 

M2 

M0 

F2 

F0 

V · min adjustment 

knob set at 0 % 

V · max adjustment 

knob set at 

required volume 

flow (V · cold ) 



V · warm 




V · cold 

V · warm = V · cold 

Warm Duct Controller 

V · warm � 80 % of V· nom 

V · min adjustment knob set 

at required volume flow 

V · warm 

V · max adjustment knob set 

at 100 % 

V · warm � 80 % of V· nom 

V · min adjustment knob set 

at 0 % 

V · max adjustment knob set 

at required volume flow 

V · warm 

Link between 2 and 4


Terminal Connections 

IMPORTANT 

The examples illustrated show the most common 

arrangements for volume flow control. The Belimo 

specifications must be observed in the overall control 

system design, selection of the other control components 

and wire sizing. 

Details of other circuits are available from Belimo. 

Room Temperature Control 

RT Controller 

Operating mode E, M 

Parallel controller VRD2 


9 

Nomenclature 

�, - Ground, neutral 

~, + Supply voltage 24 VAC or 24 VDC 

w Input voltage for set volume flow U 3 

U/pp Output voltage U 5 

and communication signal 

y Actuator signal 

z Input for override control 

Wiring 

Actuator and volume flow controller are factory wired. 

The 24 VAC/VDC voltage supply must be wired up by the 

customer. Safety transformers must be used (EN 60742). 

If several volume flow controllers are connected to one 

24 V network, it is important to ensure that a common 

neutral or ground wire is used and that this is not connected 

to other wires. 


A suitable room temperature controller or a DDC outstation 

with a 2 - 10 VDC- or 0 - 10 VDC output is connected 

with at least two wires (terminals 1 and 3) as 

shown in the circuit diagram. If there is a common 24 V 

mains supply voltage, it is important to ensure that 

terminal 1 on the VRD2 is also the ground for the control 

signal. 

Parallel Control 

Several volume flow controllers (supply or extract air) 

can be operated in parallel by one room temperature 

controller. 

If the terminal units are the same size and the V · min and 

V · max adjustment knobs are set at the same values, all the 

units control the same volume flow. If the settings differ, 

the units control an equal percentage.

Override Controls 

RT Controller 


Slave Control 

Master controller 

Operating mode M.. 

Operating mode S.. 

V · min / V· max / Shut Off Switching 


RT Controller 

All Switches 

open 

S1 open V · min 

S1 closed V · max 

Control 

mode 

S2 closed Closed 

S3 closed 

closed 

V · S4 

min 

V · max 

1) e.g. diode 1N 4007 

Slave controller 

S2 open V · min / V· max 

S2 closed Closed 

10 



The variable volume flow control can be overridden using 

zero-potential switch contacts supplied by the customer. 

This override control can be used with any controller, 

either separately or centrally, for individual rooms or parts 

of the system. If several override controls are combined, 

the contacts must be linked in relation to one another, to 

prevent short circuits. Several volume flow controllers 

can also be actuated using one switch, if a joint ground 

wire is available and the control signal is connected in 

parallel. 

These circuits will only work on an AC supply voltage! 

Supply/Extract Air Slave Control (Master/Slave) 

With parallel control of the units, an undesirable difference 

between supply and extract air can occur if the 

pressure in one duct is to low. It is therefore preferable to 

use the volume flow actual value, usually of the supply 

air, as the control signal for the slave volume flow controller. 

V · min / V· max / Shut Off Switching 

By means of simple switch contacts between the supply 

voltage connections and terminals 3 and 7, it is possible 

to change over to different set values for the volume flow. 

No control signal is necessary. 

Switch S1 enables a V · min /V · max changeover to take place 

at the controller connected. 

Using the S2 switch, several volume flow controllers can 

be actuated if a joint ground wire is available and the 

control signal is switched in parallel. This means that full 

shut off is given priority over V · min /V · max mode. 

These circuits will only work on an AC supply voltage!


Supply/Extract Air Slave Control 

for Dual Duct Unit TVM 

Commissioning Signal 

Adjuster ZEV Connections 


controller 

Cold duct controller VRD2 

Warm duct controller VRD2 

Slave controller 

VRD2 (NMV-D2) 

Operating mode S 


controller 

Operating mode M, F 

Room Temperature 

controller, switch 

cabinet or step 

distributor 

11 

Volume Flow Control of TVM Units 

The two controllers fitted to the dual duct unit TVM (cold, 

warm) must be wired by the customer as shown in the 

circuit diagram opposite (including the 24 VAC/VDC 

cross-connection). 

The room temperature controller provides the cold duct 

controller with its set point signal. 

In most cases, the proportion of warm air is increased 

from 0 to the required V · warm as a maximum set point. 

The warm duct controller (V · total is measured) is therefore 

set as a constant value controller and does not require 

a control signal. 

For a more detailed functional description, refer to the 

TVM literature. 

Supply/Extract Air Slave Control with 

Dual Duct TVM 

The actual value output signal U5 of the warm duct controller 

is proportional to the total volume flow V · total. It 

can therefore be used as the control signal for a slave 

controller. 

Commissioning Connections 

It is advisable that the signal line for connecting the adjuster 

ZEV is linked up in an easily accessible location. 

This means that ceiling panels do not need be removed 

in order to take measurements. 

Suitable locations include: spare terminals in room temperature 

controller or wall mounted enclosure. 

It is important to ensure that the ground (and 24 V) is also 

available. Therefore, a 3-wire connection is required to 

the commissioning point connection. 

IMPORTANT 

The commissioning connection will also work if the U5 signal is used for slave circuits or monitoring. However, 

the U5 signal differs from the actual value when the ZEV 

unit is connected. 

ZEV Function 

The indicating lights come on when the control knob 

settings match the current values. To adjust the control 

mode, set the mode knob, for example to 0 - 10 VDC, 

and press the Set button. The volume settings can only 

be read.

Function Test 

Fault Finding Check 

Check wiring 

Connect supply voltage 

Connect air supply systems 

Measure the actuator signal U 6 

Record actual value signal U 5 

for override control V · min 


for override control V · max 

Wiring correct? 

yes 

Supply voltage within 

the Belimo specifications? 

yes 

Actual value signals U 5 

and U 6 consistent? 

yes 

Actuator opens and closes? 

yes 

Volume flow V · min ? 

yes 

Volume flow V · max ? 

yes 

Volume flow control signal? 

yes 

Override controls? 

Correct wiring error 

Check Transformer 

etc. 

Controller faulty 

Actuator rotation correct? 

Damper obstructed? 

Duct pressure 

sufficient? 

Measuring tubing to 

the transducer 

damaged? 

Check room 

temperature controller 

Check window 

switch, relays, etc. 

Order Example Replacement Controller 

Belimo VRD2, 

preset for TVR / 125 / E2 - 140 - 300 m 3 /h 

Voltage range 2 to 10 VDC, Replacement for VRD/VRD2 

no 

no 

no 

no 

no 

no 

no 

no 

12 


Commissioning 

A function test for commissioning can be carried out by 

measuring the actuator signal U6 (terminal 6 to 1). If U6 is 

between 5.8 and 6.2 VDC, the required volume flow is 

controlled. If U6 deviates from this range, wait for the 

actuator to settle. If the commissioning procedure is to 

include verification of the set volume flows V · min and V · max, 

these must be set as described below. The actual value 

signal U5 is measured in each operating situation (check 

U6 first) and the volume flow is then calculated using the 

formulae given on page 3 (note the voltage range). 

In many cases, incorrect wiring can be the cause of the 

faults. Therefore a careful check should be carried out to 

ensure that all connections are secure. Wires in terminals 

3 to 7 should be disconnected and the actuator connection 

plug removed before the following checks are made. 

If the actuator drive is disengaged and the damper 

opened manually, the voltage U5 must increase and the 

voltage U6 deviate from 6 V. 

Connect the actuator plug, link terminals 1 and 7: 

The actuator must close. 

Change link to terminals 2 and 7: The actuator must 

open. 

Remove the link. The controller must control V · min If U6 is 

approx. 6 volts, measure U5, calculate the volume flow 

and compare it with the design value. 

Link terminals 2 and 7: Repeat measurement for V · max, as 

above. 

Remove link. Apply the control signal U3 . Calculate the 

set volume flow and compare it with the actual volume 

flow. 

Apply the override control (terminal 7) and test the desired 

functions in sequence. 

Replacement Controller 

When replacing faulty controllers, calibrated controllers 

set for the terminal box type and size must be used. 

Uncalibrated controllers can only be used as a temporary 

solution. 

The following must be specified when ordering a replacement 

controller: 

• Terminal unit type and size and in the case of TVM 

units, hot duct or cold duct controller 

• Operating mode 

• V · min and V · max 

• Voltage range 

• Delivery date of the faulty controller

Belimo VRP 

1 

Contents 

Subject Page 





Volume Flow Ranges Single Duct Units 5 

Order Code, Single Duct Units 6 

Volume Flow Ranges and Order Code 

Dual Duct Units 7 


Slave Control 9 


Design changes reserved · All rights reserved · ® Gebrüder Trox GmbH (12/2001) · Leaflet No. E016NB1

VRP 

� 

� 

� 

� 

Characteristic of Actual Value Signal 

‡ nom 

(100 %) 

Volume flow 

‡ min unit 

Controller VRP Reference value 

Transducer VFP 300 

‡ min adjustment 

knob 

‡ max adjustment 

knob 

0 

potentiometer 

Actuator connection 

cable 

Transducer connection 

cable 

Offset indicating lights 

Characteristic of Volume Flow Control Variable 

‡ max 

Volume flow 

‡ min 

� 

0 

� 

� 

� 

� 

‡ i = ‡ nom · U5 – 2 

8 

0 2 Actual value signal U5 10 VDC 

‡ S = U 3 – 2 · (‡ max – ‡ min ) + ‡ min 

8 

� 

� � 

� 

� 

� 

� 

0 2 Control signal U3 10 VDC 

2 



The Belimo VRP electronic volume flow controller, combined 

with a membrane differential pressure transducer 

VFP 300, is designed for use in VAV systems and requires 

a room temperature controller. 

Control signals can be in the range of 2 to 10 VDC (0 to 

20 V phasecut also possible). Override control can be 

achieved by external switches. Several controllers may 

be connected to one room temperature controller. Supply 

air/extract air slave circuits are also possible. 

Static Measuring Principle 

The volume flow is measured using a membrane pressure 

transducer. Therefore the VRP is suitable for the 

control of extract air with contaminants and/or which is 

dust-loden. Terminal units with painted finish or made of 

plastic should be considered in such situations. 

IMPORTANT 

In critical cases, a material test should be carried out 

on the terminal unit and membrane pressure transducer, 

to prove suitability for chemicals and concentrations 

concerned. 


The volume flow is measured on the static differential 

pressure principle. The differential pressure sensor in 

the terminal unit measures the effective pressure (�pe ). 

This causes a membrane in the pressure transducer to 

deflect, the movement is detected and converted into a 

linear pressure voltage signal. The linearisation of the 

volume flow is carried out in the VRP. 



to the unit nominal volume flow rate (‡ nom). The actual 

volume flow is available as a 2 to 10 VDC signal (U5). The required volume flow is set by the room temperature 

controller via the control signal within the limits of ‡ min 

and ‡ max. The VRP determines the required volume flow 

in accordance with the characteristic shown and compares 

this with the actual value. The damper actuator is 

controlled according to the deviation. The Belimo VRP 

can only operate with the matched Belimo actuators 

which are optimized for volume flow control. It is not 

possible to connect other 3-point or 0 to 10 VDC actuators. 

Gravity Dependency 

Because of the weight of the membrane the positioning 

of the VFP affects the measured signal. The VFP is normally 

calibrated for a vertical position of the membrane, 

i.e. pressure tube connections above or below horizontal 

plane. Other installation positions must be specified on 

order.




1000 

Pa 

800 

600 

400 

200 

V min 

� V 

Volume flow 

‡ max set value = 

‡ min set value = 

‡ max M 

‡ min M 

· 

Vmax set value = 

= 

‡ max S 

‡ max M 

‡ max 

‡ nom 

‡ min 

‡ max 

‡ max S 

‡ min S 

. 

. 100 % 

. 100 % 

‡ nom M 

‡ nom S 

V max 

� V 

20 40 60 80 100 

% of ‡ nom 

. 100 % 

3 



the duct pressure, i.e. pressure fluctuations cause no 

changes to volume flow 




lead to volume flow deviation �‡ shown opposite. 





The ‡ max value corresponds to the volume flow which is 

set with a 10 VDC control signal or ‡ max override control. 


figures relate to ‡ nom. 


The ‡ min value corresponds to the volume flow which is 

set with a 2 VDC control signal or ‡ min override control. 

‡ min may be set between 0 and 80 % of ‡ max. The percentage 

figures relate to the ‡ max volume flow setting. If 

‡ min is set to 0 %, a tight shut off of the damper is not 

guaranteed. The controller closes the damper until the 

actual value signal is 2 VDC corresponding to 0 l/s. 

Measurement tolerances mean that a leakage air flow is 

present. Override control should be used for tight shut 

off. 

Slave Control 

The VRP only provides for ratio control, i.e. the supply 

and extract air must be in the same ratio under all 

operating conditions. 

The volume flow ratio is set using the ‡ max adjustment 


shown opposite. Where the volume flows are the same 

and the units of equal size, the setting will be 100 %. 

The setting range is from 30 to 100 %. If ‡ max set value 

>100 %, the master and slave functions must be reversed. 

As a rule, the ‡ min adjustment knob on the slave 

is set to 0 %.

VRP Adjustment Knobs 

� 

� 

� 

� � 

IMPORTANT 

The reference value potentiometer must not be 

adjusted. 


U 5 = ‡ max 

‡ nom 


U 5 = ‡ min 

‡ nom 

‡ min 

% of ‡ max 

. 8 V + 2 V 

. 8 V + 2 V 

� 

‡ min adjustment knob 

‡ max adjustment knob 


‡ max 

4 




using the ‡ min and ‡ max adjustment knobs on the VRP. 

Calculations are based on the formulae shown on 

page 3. 

Adjustment Procedure 

• First set ‡ max and then ‡ min . 

• If the ratio of ‡ max to ‡ min is to remain constant 

(e.g. ‡ min = 50 % of ‡ max ), only the ‡ max adjustment 

knob must be moved. 

• Moving the ‡ min adjustment knob will have no effect 

on the ‡ max value. 

• If ‡ max is to be altered and ‡ min to remain unchanged, 

‡ max must be reset first, followed by ‡ min . 

Calculating the Volume Flow Using 

the Actual Value Signal U5 The accuracy of the setting can be increased if the actual 

value signal U5 is also measured with the system switched 

on. 


operating voltage for at least 15 minutes before measurements 

begin. 

• Calculate the required value for U5 at ‡ max 

• Disconnect all the wires from the terminal block, 

except for terminals 1 and 2 

• Insert a link between terminals 2 and 7 

• Move the ‡ max adjustment knob until the voltage U5 corresponds to the calculated value (wait approx. 

2 minutes after the adjustment, then read the voltage) 

• Remove the link between 2 and 7 

• Calculate the voltage for U5 at ‡ min 

• Proceed with the ‡ min setting as for ‡ max 

• Replace original wiring 

Zero Point Adjustment 


It is necessary to readjust the zero point, when one of the 

indicating lights show a measurement off limits with 

measurement tubing pushed off. For further information 

about zero point adjustment see product information 

VFP.


Volume Flow Ranges TVZ, TVA, TVR, TVRK 

Size 

V · min- 

V 

unit 

· to 

to from min- 

V to from 

unit 

· l/s m 

nom 

3 /h 

V 

1) 1) 

· V max 

· min 

V · min 

V · max 

to 

V · nom 

1002) 15 75 30 95 54 270 108 342 

125 25 120 45 150 90 432 162 540 

160 40 200 75 250 144 720 270 900 

200 65 325 120 405 234 1170 432 1458 

250 95 490 185 615 342 1764 666 2214 

315 155 820 310 1025 558 2952 1116 3690 

400 255 1345 505 1680 918 4842 1818 6048 


B x H 

mm 


l/s m 3 /h 

to from 

200 x 100 45 170 65 215 162 612 234 774 

300 x 100 65 255 95 320 234 918 342 1152 

400 x 100 85 340 130 425 306 1224 468 1530 

500 x 100 105 430 160 535 378 1548 576 1926 

600 x 100 130 520 195 650 468 1872 702 2340 

200 x 200 85 330 125 415 306 1188 450 1494 

300 x 200 125 495 185 620 450 1782 666 2232 

400 x 200 165 660 250 825 594 2376 900 2970 

500 x 200 205 830 310 1035 738 2988 1116 3726 

600 x 200 250 1000 375 1250 900 3600 1350 4500 

700 x 200 290 1160 435 1450 1044 4176 1566 5220 

800 x 200 330 1320 495 1650 1188 4752 1782 5940 

300 x 300 185 735 275 920 666 2646 990 3312 

400 x 300 245 985 370 1230 882 3546 1332 4428 

500 x 300 305 1230 460 1535 1098 4428 1656 5526 

600 x 300 370 1480 555 1850 1332 5328 1998 6660 

700 x 300 430 1720 645 2150 1548 6192 2322 7740 

800 x 300 490 1960 735 2450 1764 7056 2646 8820 

900 x 300 555 2215 830 2770 1998 7974 2988 9972 

1000 x 300 620 2480 930 3100 2232 8928 3348 11160 

400 x 400 325 1305 490 1630 1170 4698 1764 5868 

500 x 400 410 1630 610 2040 1476 5868 2196 7344 

600 x 400 490 1960 735 2450 1764 7056 2646 8820 

700 x 400 570 2280 855 2850 2052 8208 3078 10260 

800 x 400 650 2600 975 3250 2340 9360 3510 11700 

900 x 400 735 2935 1100 3670 2646 10566 3960 13212 

1000 x 400 820 3280 1230 4100 2952 11808 4428 14760 

500 x 500 510 2030 760 2540 1836 7308 2736 9144 

600 x 500 610 2440 915 3050 2196 8784 3294 10980 

700 x 500 710 2840 1065 3550 2556 10224 3834 12780 

800 x 500 810 3240 1215 4050 2916 11664 4374 14580 

900 x 500 915 3655 1370 4570 3294 13158 4932 16452 

1000 x 500 1020 4080 1530 5100 3672 14688 5508 18360 

600 x 600 730 2920 1095 3650 2628 10512 3942 13140 

700 x 600 850 3400 1275 4250 3060 12240 4590 15300 

800 x 600 970 3880 1455 4850 3492 13968 5238 17460 

900 x 600 1100 4400 1650 5500 3960 15840 5940 19800 

1000 x 600 1220 4880 1830 6100 4392 17568 6588 21960 

700 x 700 990 3960 1485 4950 3564 14256 5346 17820 

800 x 700 1140 4560 1710 5700 4104 16416 6156 20520 

900 x 700 1280 5120 1920 6400 4608 18432 6912 23040 

1000 x 700 1420 5680 2130 7100 5112 20448 7668 25560 

800 x 800 1300 5200 1950 6500 4680 18720 7020 23400 

900 x 800 1460 5840 2190 7300 5256 21024 7884 26280 

1000 x 800 1620 6480 2430 8100 5832 23328 8748 29160 

900 x 900 1640 6560 2460 8200 5904 23616 8856 29520 

1000 x 900 1820 7280 2730 9100 6552 26208 9828 32760 

1000 x 1000 2020 8080 3030 10100 7272 29088 10908 36360 



5 

to V · nom 


to from to V · nom


Volume flow 

in % of V · nom 


∆V · in ± % 

TVZ, TVA, TVR, TVRK TVJ/TVT 

100 5 5 

80 5 5 

60 7 7 

40 7 8 

20 9 14 

10 20 >14 

20 >14 

6 




TVZ-R / 160 / 00 / BB3 / E - 50 - 240 l/s 

TVR / 160 / 00 / BB3 / M - 50 - 240 l/s 

TVA-R / 160 / 00 / BB1 / S - 50 - 240 l/s 


Operating 

mode 

E 

M 

S 

F 


E Individual 

M Master 

S Slave 

F Fixed 


. 

Vmin Operating mode 

‡ min adjustment knob set at required ‡ min 

‡ max adjustment knob set at required ‡ max 

‡ min adjustment knob set at 0 % 

‡ max adjustment knob set at volume flow 

ratio to the master controller 

V · < 80 % of V · nom 

‡ min adjustment knob set at required 


‡ max adjustment knob set at 100 % (‡ nom ) 

V · > 80 % of V · nom 

‡ min adjustment knob set at 0 % 

‡ max adjustment knob set at required 


Link between terminal 2 and 4 

. 

Vmax



Size 


Volume flow 


1) Percentages related to ‡ actual 

l/s m 3 /h 

V · min-unit V · V min-unit 

· nom 

TVM cold 

∆V · in ± % 

100 5 7 

80 5 10 

60 5 12 

40 7 15 

30 8 17 

20 9 - 

10 20 - 

20 - 

V · nom 

125 45 150 162 540 

160 75 250 270 900 

200 120 405 432 1458 

250 185 615 666 2214 

TVM total 

7 

Dual Duct Units Type TVM 



TVM-R / 160 / BE7 / E - 50 - 240 l/s 

TVM-R / 160 / BE7 / F - 400 l/s 


Operating 

mode Cold Duct 

Controller 

E 

M 

F 

‡ min adjustment 

knob set 

at 0 % 

‡ max adjustment 

knob set 

at required 

volume flow 

(‡ cold ) 


E Individual 

M Master 

F Fixed 


. 

Vwarm . 

Vcold . . 

Vwarm = Vcold Warm Duct Controller 

V · warm < = 80 % of V · nom 

‡ min adjustment knob set at 

required volume flow ‡ warm 

‡ max adjustment knob set at 

100 % 

V · warm > 80 % of V· nom 

‡ min adjustment knob set at 

0% 

‡ max adjustment knob set at 

required volume flow ‡ warm 

Link between 2 and 4


Plug connection to 

Transducer VFP 


actuator 

IMPORTANT 





and wire sizing. Details of other circuits are 

available from Belimo. 

Room Temperature Control with Override 

and Parallel Control 

� 

24 VAC 

RT Controller 

y 

˜ 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 

VRP 

Diode 1N 4007 

S1 

S2 

S3 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 

VRP Parallel Controller 

1 

Operating mode M, E 


8 


Nomenclature 

Ground, neutral 

� Supply voltage 24 VAC 

w1 Input voltage for set volume flow (2 to 10 VDC) 

w2 Input voltage for set volume flow 

(0 to 20 V phasecut) 

U5 Output voltage for actual volume flow (2 to 10 VDC) 

U6 Actuator signal 


Wiring 


The 24 VAC voltage supply must be wired up by the 







A suitable room temperature controller or a DDC outstation 

with a 2-10 VDC output is connected with at least 

two wires (terminals 1 and 3) as shown in the circuit diagram. 

If there is a common 24 VAC mains supply voltage, 

it is important to ensure that terminal 1 on the VRP is 

also the ground for the control signal. 


Several volume flow controllers (supply or extract air) can 

be operated in parallel by one room temperature controller. 

If the terminal units are the same size and the ‡ min 

and ‡ max adjustment knobs are set at the same values, 

all the units control the same volume flow. If the settings 

differ, the units control an equal percentage. 


Potential-free switch contacts provided by the customer 

can override the variable volume flow control. This forced 

control can be applied separately for each controller (see 

overleaf for examples) or centrally as in the circuit diagram 

shown for one building section. 

S1, S2, S3 open : Room temperature control mode 

S1 closed : Shut off 

S2 closed : Constant volume flow ‡ max 

S3 closed : Constant volume flow ‡ min 

With a combination of several override controls, the 

switches must be interlocked such that no short-circuits 

occur. One switch can control several volume flow controllers 

if there is a common ground and the control signal 

is wired in parallel. The circuits apply even if room 

temperature controller with 0 to 20 V phase cut signal is 

used.


Slave Control 

RT Controller 

Master Controller 

Operating Mode M, E 

Slave Controller 



Operating Mode S 

RT Controller 

Cold Controller 

Warm Controller 

Operating Mode M, (E,F) 

Slave 

Controller 


TVM 

9 






air, as the control signal for the slave volume flow controller. 




circuit diagram opposite (including the 24 VAC crossconnection). 




from 0 to the required ‡ warm as a maximum set point. The 

warm duct controller (‡ total is measured) is therefore set 

as a constant value controller and does not require a 

control signal. 




with Dual Duct TVM 

The actual value output signal U5 of the warm duct controller 

is proportional to the total volume flow ‡ total. It can 

therefore be used as the control signal for a slave controller.

Function Test 


Check wiring 


Connect air supply system 

Pressure transducer zero point 

Measure actuator signal U 6 


for override control ‡ min 


for override control ‡ max 

Supply voltage due to 

Belimo requirements? 

Signals U 5 and U 6 

consistent? 

Actuator opening and 

closing? 

Volume flow ‡ min ? 

Volume flow ‡ max ? 

Volume flow control 

signal? 


Check transformer 

etc. 

Controller 

faulty, replace 

Actuator rotation 

correct? 

Damper blocked? 

Duct pressure 

sufficient? 

Measurement 

tubes to transducer 

damaged? 

Protective wrapping 

removed? 

Check room temperature 

controller 

Check window 

switch, relay etc. 


Belimo VRP, preset for TVZ 125, 60...140 l/s 

and VFP 300 

Belimo VFP 300 

10 

Commissioning 



measuring the actuator signal U 6 (terminal 6 to 1). If U 6 is 

between 5.8 and 6.2 VDC, the required volume flow is 

controlled. If U 6 deviates from this range, wait for the 

actuator to settle. 

If the commissioning procedure is to include verification 

of the set volume flows ‡ min and ‡ max, these must be set 

as described below. 

The actual value signal U 5 is measured in each operating 

situation (check U 6 first) and the volume flow is then calculated 

using the formulae given on page 4. 

NOTE 

Severe vibration during transport or caused by different 

installation conditions can necessitate subsequent zero 

point adjustment. The procedure is described in the 

product information for VFP. 





plug removed before the following checks are made. 



voltage U6 deviate from 6 VDC. 

Connect the actuator plug, link terminals 1 and 7: The 

actuator must close. 


open. 

Remove the link. The controller must control ‡ min. If U6 is 



Link terminals 2 and 7: Repeat measurement for ‡ max, as 

above. 

Remove link. Apply the control signal U3 . Calculate the 

set volume flow and compare it with the actual volume 

flow. 

Apply the override control (terminal 7) and test the 

desired functions in sequence. 





solution. When ordering replacement controllers, specify 

‡ min and ‡ max.

Belimo VRP-STP 

1 

Contents 

Subject Page 



Differential Pressure Control 3 

Differential Pressure Adjustment on Site 3 

Order Code, Examples 4 


Examples 6 

Override Control 6 



VRP-STP Area of Application 

�� 

The Belimo VRP-STP differential pressure controller 

� 

combined with a membrane differential pressure transducer 

VFP 100, is designed for room pressure control 

�� 

of sealed rooms; when combined with a VFP 300 or 

VFP 600, it is designed for control of duct pressure. No 

control signal is required if constant differential pressure 

� 

is to be maintained. The constant differential pressure 

can be set manually in the range from 30 to 100 % on the 

adjustment knob. Alternatively, the set value can be preset 

externally by a control signal between 2 to 10 VDC. 

� 

� 

Override controls can be achieved by external switches. 

For parallel operation, several controllers can be connected 

to a common control signal. Supply air/extract 

duct pressure control sequence available. 

� 

� 

� 

Controller VRP-STP 

Transducer VFP 300 

�p adjustment knob 

� 

� 

� 

� 

Characteristic of Differential 

Pressure Control Variable 

Reference value 

potentiometer 

Actuator connection 


�p nom 

(Pa) 

Differential 

Pressure 

�pmin 0 

�p max 

Differential pressure 

0 

�pact = �pnom · U5 – 2 

8 

U3 –2 

�preqd = ·�p 

8 max 

Transducer connection 

cable 

Offset indicating lights 

0 2 Actual value signal U5 10VDC 

0 2 Control signal U3 10VDC 

2 




transducer. Therefore the VRP-STP is suitable for 

the control of extract air with contaminants and/or which 

is dust-loden. Terminal units with painted finish or made 

of plastic should be considered in such situations. 

IMPORTANT 




concerned. 


The differential pressure is measured on the static principle. 

The differential pressure causes a membrane in the 

pressure transducer to deflect, the movement is detected 

and converted into a linear pressure-voltage signal. The 

transducer pressure range is selected and factory-set to 

the measurement range required such that the differential 

pressure can be adjusted up or down by the customer. 

10 VDC (100 %) always corresponds to the nominal differential 

pressure (�pnom). The actual differential pressure 

is measured as a 2 to 10 VDC signal (U5). The nominal 

differential pressure is preset via the �p adjustment 

knob. For variable set values, an external 2 to 10 VDC 

signal controls the differential pressure in the range from 

0 to �pmax. The VRP-STP determines the required pressure in accordance 

with the characteristic shown and compares 

this with the actual value. The damper actuator is controlled 

according to the deviation. The Belimo VRP-STP 

can only operate with the matched Belimo actuators 

which are optimized for volume flow control. It is not 

possible to connect other 3-point or 0 to 10 VDC actuators. 

Gravity Dependent 






order.



1000 

Pa 

800 

Differential 

pressure (duct) 

600 

400 

200 

Adjustment Knob 

� 

� 

1 

2 

IMPORTANT 

20 40 60 80 % 100 


(controller set value) 

�pmax �pmax set value = · 100 % 

�pnom �p adjustment knob 


The reference value potentiometer must not be 

adjusted. 

�pmax U5 = · 8 V + 2 V 

�pnom 3 

Differential Pressure Control 


the duct pressure, i.e. pressure fluctuations cause no 





lead to volume flow deviation �‡ shown opposite. 




�p Adjustment 

The �p adjustment knob is used to set the required differential 

pressure. With variable control, the pressure can 

be limited to the maximum value �p max which is held 

constant at full control value (10 VDC). 

The percentages refer to the nominal differential pressure 

(�p nom). The adjustment range is from 30 to 100 %. 

Differential Pressure Adjustment on Site 

If later adjustment to the differential pressure is required, 

the potentiometer is set to the new value using the formula 

specified. The accuracy of the setting can be increased 

if the actual value signal U 5 is also measured and 

the following procedure carried out with the system 

switched on: 

• Calculate U 5 voltage for �p 

• If control signal U 5 is present set U 3 to 10 VDC or set 

wire bridge from terminal 2 to 4 

• Adjust �p potentiometer until voltage U 5 corresponds 

to the calculated value (wait approx. 2 minutes after 

adjustment, then read voltage) 

• If the VRP-STP is operated with control signal U 3, 

remove bridge 2 to 4 again.

Room Pressure Ranges 

Differential 

pressure 

transducer 

VFP 100 

Duct Pressure Ranges 

Differential 

pressure 

transducer 

VFP 300 

VFP 600 

Differential Pressure Control Tolerances 

�p 

in % of �p nom 

100 

< 80 

< 60 

< 40 

< 30 

< 30 

�p min 1) 

Pa 

2.5 30 100 

1.5 15 50 

1.5 7.5 25 

�p min 1) 

Pa 

�p 

from 

Pa 

�p 

from 

Pa 

to �p nom 

Pa 

7.5 90 300 

4 30 100 

15 180 600 

7.5 90 300 

Control tolerance 

± % 

>15 

>15 

>17 

>18 

> 10 

>10 

to �p nom 

Pa 

1) With a control signal the set value could be lower than 30 % 

of �p nom. But pressure diffrentials < �p min are set to 0, resp. could 

not be controlled stable. 

2) It is possible to control negative room pressure with a supply 

terminal unit. 

4 



TVR / 160 / 00 / BG3 / Z - 15 Pa 

TVR -15 Pa2) / 160 / 00 / BG3 / Z - 

TVR / 160 / 00 / BH3 / A - -250 Pa 

Factory Differential Pressure Setting 

TVZ, TVA, TVR, TVRK, TVJ, TVT 

Room pressure 

control 

Duct pressure 

control 

Customers Fittings 


A Extract air 

Z Supply air 

Operating mode Factory setting 

Positive room 

pressure 

Negative room 

pressure 

Supply air duct 

pressure 

Extract air duct 

pressure 


�p 

Differential pressure sensor of terminal 

unit short-circuited 

�p potentiometer to pressure 

difference ordered 

�p potentiometer to pressure 

difference ordered 

Operating mode Measures 

Room measuring tube to plus 

reference room measuring 

Room measuring tube to minus 

Reference room measuring tube on plus 

Duct measuring tube to plus 

Duct measuring tube to minus



IMPORTANT 


Transducer VFP ... 


arrangements for pressure control. The Belimo specifications 

must be observed in the overall control 



available from Belimo. 


Reference 

Room 


Supply air 

Plug connection 

to actuator 

Room 

Unit Unit 

Positive Pressure 

Negative Pressure 

Extract air 

IMPORTANT 

For VAV terminal boxes for room pressure control and 

required “shut off”: 

The options “supply air/room negative pressure” and 

“extract air/room positive pressure” needs a wiring 

on site for “damper open”, so that the damper will be 

closed (see page 6). 

5 

Nomenclature 

Ground, neutral 

� Supply voltage 24 VAC 

w1 Input voltage for set differential pressure (2 to 10 VDC) 

w2 Input voltage for set differential pressure 

(0 to 20 V phasecut) 

U5 Output voltage for differential pressure (2 to 10 VDC) 

U6 Actuator signal 


Wiring 





24 VAC network, it is important to ensure that a common 



The control signal for the nominal value emitter has 

2 cores connected to the differential pressure controller. 

If the the measurement and adjustment sites are far 

apart, remove the made-up plug on the actuator cable 

and extend the cable. This is easier and more reliable 

than extending the measurement tube. 

Tube Connections 

Tube dimensions : di = 6 mm 

Max. Lengths : 10 m 

(Plus and Minus total) 1) 

Material : Polyurethane1) Room Pressure Control 

The VFP100 has the tube connections shown for room 

pressure control. The measurement points in the room 

and in the reference room must be turbulence-free (no 

influence by room flow, no dynamic part pd). Note: 

If groups of rooms with different set points of differential 

pressure are arranged in sequence, all transducers 

VFP100 should work with a common reference pressure, 

e.g. atmospheric pressure. 


The tube connections for supply and extraction air differ 

as shown on the sketch. The pressure connection not 

used must remain open or connected to the reference 

pressure via a tube. 

1) Recommendation

Parallel Differential Pressure Control with 

Override Control 

24 VAC 

VRP-STP 

Set point adjuster 

S1* 

S2* 

S3* 


Z, A 

VRP-STP 


Z, A 

* Switch S2 only in combination with 

control signal w1 or w2 Combination of Duct-Pressure and 


Room 

Nomenclature 

1 Terminal unit, extract air 

2 Measuring point for extract air duct pressure 

3 Measuring point for extract air volume flow 

4 Terminal unit, supply air 

6 


Potential-free switch contacts provided by the customer 

can override the variable volume flow control. This forced 

control can be applied separately for each controller 

(see overleaf for examples) or centrally as in the circuit 

diagram shown for one building section. 

Shut off 

Closing switch S1 (e.g. by window contact) causes the 

damper to close. This override control provides shut off 

for unit types TVZ/TVA/TVR while maintaining the permitted 

leakage air volume flow to DIN 1946 Part 4. 

S1 open : control mode 

S1 closed : shut off 

S3 closed : Override Control OPEN 

�p max Override Control 

The variable differential pressure control is interrupted by 

closing the switch. Control of the maximum differential 

pressure takes priority. 

S2 open : variable control mode 

S2 closed : constant pressure �p max 

NOTE 


With a combination of several override controls, the 

switches must be interlocked such that no short-circuits 

occur. One switch can control several volume flow controllers 

if there is a common ground and the control 

signal is wired in parallel. The circuits apply even if room 

temperature controller with 0 to 20 V phase cut signal is 

used. 


Several differential pressure controllers can be operated 

in parallel by one set point adjuster from one nominal 

vatue emitter. Thus the nominal values for several rooms 

or ducts can be altered simultaneously. 

Example application: 

Day/night switching or sliding operation. For example 

several room or duct pressures can be controlled following 

the same percentage values. 

Extract Air Duct Pressure Control and 

Supply Air Slave Control 

The VRP-STP controls the pressure in the extract air duct 

on the low pressure side as it acts directly on the damper 

of the terminal unit. The controller VRD of the terminal 

unit is used to measure the extract air volume flow. 

The actual value output signal U5 for the extract air VRD 

is used to control the VRD on the supply air terminal unit. 

This ensures that the supply and extract air volume flows 

are always identical or stand in the required ratio to each 

other.


Function Test 


Check wiring 


Connect air control systems 

� 

Pressure transducer zero point 

Measure actuator signal U 6 

Override control �p max : 


(Only for control signal U 3 and U 4 ) 

Supply voltage due to 

Belimo requirements? 

� yes 

Signals U 5 and U 6 

consistent? 

� 

Actuator opening 

and closing? 

yes 

� 

Differential 

pressure �p? 

yes 

� 

Differential 

pressure �pmax ? 

yes 

� yes 

Control signal 

� yes 



etc. 

Regulator 

faulty, replace 

Actuator rotation 

correct? 


Duct pressure 

sufficient? 

Measurement 

tubes to transducer 

VFP... damaged? 

Check position encoder, 

wire bridge 

2 to 4 removed 

Check window 

switches, relays 

etc. 

Order Example for Replacement Controller 

� 

� 

no 

no 

Belimo VRP-STP and VFP300, preset for TVR 125, 

and supply air duct pressure 250 Pa 

Belimo VRP-STP and VFP100, preset for TVR 125, 

and negative room pressure, extract air, 20 Pa 

no � 

no � 

no � 

no � 

� 

no � 

� 

Belimo VFP300 

7 

Commissioning 


measuring the actuator signal U 6 (terminal 6 to 1). If U 6 is 

between 5.8 and 6.2 VDC, the required differential pressure 

is controlled. 

If the maximum differential pressure �p max should be 

shown for variable control, proceed as described below. 

Measure the actual value signal U 5 (having first checked 

U 6) and then determine the differential pressure from the 

formula on page 2. 

NOTE 

Severe vibration during transport or other installation 

situations can necessitate subsequent adjustment of the 

zero point setting. The procedure is described in the 

product information for VFP... 





plug removed before the following checks are made 

except link 2 to 4. 



voltage U6 deviate from 6 VDC. 

Connect the actuator plug, link terminals 1 and 7: The 

actuator must close. 


open. 

Wire bridge from 2 to 7: the actuator must open1). Remove the link. The controller must control ‡ min. If U6 is 



If a control signal U3 or U4 is used, link terminal 2 and 7 

and repeat the measurement for �pmax as before. 

Remove the link from 2 to 4. Apply control signal U3. Calculate the set differential pressure and compare with 

the actual differential pressure. 

Apply override control (terminal 7) and test the desired 

functions in sequence. 





solution. When ordering replacement controllers, specify 

�pmax. 1) The direction can be reversed for room pressure control.

Belimo VFP 

1 

Contents 

Subject Page 



Gravity-Dependency 3 

Zero Point Adjustment 3 


VFP 

� Transducer VFP 

� Positive pressure 

connection 

Measurement Range 


�p nom 

(100%) 


0 

0 

Made-Up Plug Connector 

Tube for pressure 

measurement point 

� Negative pressure 

connection 

� Transducer connection 

Transducer Range 

Pa 

VFP 100 100 

VFP 300 300 

VFP 600 600 

Actual value signal* 

* Actual value signal of the VFP not identical 

with the U 5 output signal of the regulator VRP 

2 


The electronic membrane pressure transducer VFP... is 

designed for use in VAV systems. Combined with the 

Belimo VRP controller, it is used for measuring actual 

values for volume flow control and with the VRP-STP 

controller, for room and duct pressure control. The 

mounting and wiring and tube connections for volume 

flow control are factory-fitted. The tube connections for 

room or duct pressure control must be made by the 

customer. The gravity-dependency must be taken into 

account during installation. The correct installation position 

is shown by an arrow for factory mounting. VFP... is 

supplied with voltage via the VRP(-STP) controller. 

Because of the static membrane measuring principle, the 

VFP... is suitable for VAV-systems with contaminated air 

with fluff or sticky particles or aggressive media. 

IMPORTANT 




concerned. 


The differential pressure is measured on the static principle. 

The differential pressure causes a membrane in the 

pressure transducer to deflect, the movement is detected 

and converted into a linear pressure-voltage signal. 

The transducer pressure range is selected and factoryset 

to the measurement range required such that the 

differential pressure can be adjusted up or down by the 

customer. 

Nomenclature 

1 Supply voltage 

2 Ground 

3 Actual value signal (0 to 10 VDC) 

Belimo VFP

Belimo VFP 


� Measurement range potentiometer 

(do not adjust!) 

� Zero point potentiometer 

Measurement Points for Static Pressure 

Room 

Pressure measurement point 



3 

Gravity-Dependency, Zero Point Adjustment 






order.If necessary, using the zero point potentiometer, the 

transducer can be customer-set to another mounting 

position. The supply voltage must be connected to the 

VFP for at least an hour before carrying out measurements. 

It is necessary to readjust the zero point if with 

diconnected tubes: 

• One of the VRP offset indicating lights is on 

• The U 5 signal is measured at between > 2.5 VDC and 

> 1.7 (prior version without indicating lights). 

Proceed as follows: 

• open housing cover 

• remove measurement tube 

• adjust zero point potentiometer until the actual value 

output signal U 5 (on regulator VRP) is 2 VDC +/-0.1 V 

• replace tube connection 

• close housing cover 

• The centre line of the pressure measurement point 

must intersect the pipe axis at right angles. 1) 

• The drilling diameter (d) should be as small as possible 

but sufficiently large to minimize risks of blocking and 

insufficient dynamics. 1) 

• Minimum distance 2 D must be maintained in the 

neutral wire before and after the air control damper. 

Requirements for Measurement Point 

• Minimum distance 2 D must be maintained in the 

neutral wire behind elbows and bends. 

• Room pressure assessment points must not be 

arranged in areas influenced by room flows. 

1) DIN 1952

Belimo Actuators 

1 

Contents 

Subject Page 

NM24-V 2 

AF24-V 2 

SM24-V 3 

GM24-V 3 


NM 24-V 

� Shaft clamp 

� Direction of 

rotation switch 

AF 24-V 

5 

1 

2 

3 

1 Shaft clamp 

2 Hexagon socket for 

manual damper driving 

3 Direction of rotation 

switch 

� Gear release button 

� Connection cable 

� Rotation angle limiter 

4 

4 

5 

Connection cable 

Rotation angle limiter 

2 

Actuator NM 24-V 

Application 

Maintenance free damper actuator for VAV terminal units 

with Belimo volume flow controllers. 

Function 

The actuator is factory mounted and fixed to the damper 

shaft. The integral rotation angle limiter is set. The 

actuator is overload protected. When the end stops are 

reached, the actuator stops automatically; limit switches 

are not required. 

The direction of rotation can be set via a switch (factory 

set). For manual adjustment, the gears can be disengaged 

via a button. 

Spring Return Actuator AF 24-V 


Application 

Maintenance-free damper actuator for VAV terminal units 

with Belimo volume flow controllers for applications 

where, for safety reasons, either an open or closed 

damper position must be guaranteed in the event of a 

power failure (order to state fail position). 

Function 

The open or closed damper position is factory set when 

mounting the actuator. If the voltage fails or is interrupted, 

the return spring moves the damper to the fail 

position. The rotation angle limiter is fitted and set. 

The actuator is overload-protected. When the end stops 

are reached, the actuator stops automatically; limit 

switches are not necessary. 


set). For manual adjustment the actuator can be turned 

by crank to any position and fixed.


SM 24-V 

1 

2 

3 

4 

GM 24-V 

3 

Shaft clamp 

Direction of rotation switch 

Gear release button 


3 

1 Shaft clamp 

2 Direction of rotation switch 

3 Gear release button 

4 


1 

2 

4 

1 

2 

4 

3 

Actuator SM 24-V 

Application 


with higher torques and Belimo volume flow controllers. 

Function 


shaft. The integral rotation angle limiter is set. The actuator 

is overload protected. When the end stops are 





via a button. 

Actuator GM 24-V 

Application 


with highest torques and Belimo volume flow controllers. 

Function 


shaft. The integral rotation angle limiter is set. The actuator 

is overload protected. when the end stops are 





via a button.

Belimo VAV-Compact NMV-D2 

1 

Contents 

Subject Page 



Volume Flow Control Tolerances 4 


Volume Flow Ranges Single-duct Units 5 

Order Code, Examples, Single-duct Units 6 

Dual-duct Unit TVM 7 

Wiring Connections 8 

Variable Volume Flow Operating Mode 9 

Constant Volume flow Control 10 



Design changes reserved · All rights reserved · ® Gebrüder Trox GmbH (12/2001) · Leaflet No. E016MB9

VAV-Compact, NMV-D2 

NMV-D2 

Tube connection for transducer 

Gear release button 


Variable Volume Flow Operating Mode 

Room temperature controller, 

DDC-outstation etc. 

Set- 

Volume flow 

Constant Volume Flow Operating Mode 

Volume flow 

control setting 

Set- 

Volume flow 

Actual 

Volume flow 

NMV-D2 

Slave controller, 

monitoring, etc. 

Actual 

Volume flow 

NMV-D2 


2 


The VAV Compact NMV-D2 from Belimo is a complete 

control unit designed for VAV volume flow control units. 

The dynamic differential pressure transducer, damper 

actuator and electronic controls are combined in one 

housing. There are two operating modes available for the 

control function. For variable volume flow control, a suitable 

room temperature controller (alternatively, an air 

quality controller or similar) or a DDC outstation must be 

used. The control signal provides the volume set point. 

Switches or relays are used for constant volume flow 

control with up to 3 set values. 

The actual value of the volume flow is output as a standard 

linear, electrical signal. The voltage range for the 

actual and set values is standardised at 0 to 10 VDC. 

Using the ZEV setting unit, the customer can change to 

2 to 10 VDC. 

The volume flow is microprocessor-controlled on a digital 

basis. The VAV Compact has no potentiometer or 

switches, because all the parameters, including V · min and 

V · max, are stored in memory. Trox supplies the controller 

with all the parameters set. The volume flow can be 

changed by the customer easily and reliably using an 

adjuster (Belimo ZEV) and certain parameters can be 

read. 

Several controllers can be connected to a common room 

temperature controller for parallel operation. Supply/ 

extract air slave circuits can be provided. 

Standard filtration in air-conditioning systems allows the 

use of the NMV-D2 in the supply air without dust protection 

filters. Since a small volume flow is passed through 

the transmitter in order to monitor the volume flow, the 

following must be noted: 




or contains aggressive media, the NMV-D2 

should not be used. 


The VAV Compact acts as a volume flow controller. The 

external room temperature controller determines the control 

signal used for volume set point. The actual value of 

the volume flow can be monitored as an option. The 

room temperature controller must have at least one analogue 

output. 


By means of simple switches, the VAV Compact can be 

set at the programmed set values or the OPEN or 

CLOSED damper position. Relay circuits or a controller 

(DDC outstation) enable a changeover to be made. The 

controller must have corresponding outputs which switch 

accordingly. The actual value of the volume flow can be 

monitored.


Characteristic of the Actual Value Signal 

Volume flow 

A 0 to 10 VDC (standard) B 2 to 10 VDC 

V · actual = V· nom 

Characteristic of Volume Flow Variable 

Volume flow 

‡ nom 

(100 %) 

‡ min unit 

U 5 

10 

V · actual = V· U5-2 nom 

8 


V · set = U 3 

10 (V· max - V · min) + V · min 

Actual value signal U 5 

‡ nom 

V . 

min unit 

Control signal U 3 

V · set = U 3 - 2 

8 

Adjustment range 

(V · max -V · min)+V · min 

3 



pressure principle. The effective pressure (∆p w) of the differential 

pressure sensor in the volume flow terminal unit 

enables a partial volume flow passing through the transmitter 

to be detected and measured. Two temperaturedependent 

resistors are used to measure this partial 

volume flow, which is proportional to the total volume 

flow, linearised, and temperature compensated. The 

volume flow is calculated by the controller's microprocessor. 

The characteristic of the effective pressure is calibrated 

in the controller, so that linearisation can be executed 

by the microprocessor. The actual volume flow can 

be monitored as the voltage signal U 5 The measuring 

range is set to suit each unit size during factory calibration, 

so that the maximum rated volume flow (V · nom) is 

always 10 VDC. 


controller or by switch contacts. The controller determines 

the set volume flow in accordance with the characteristic 

shown opposite and compares this with the 

actual value. The damper actuator is controlled according 

to the deviation. The volume flow values V · min and 

V · max which are parameters are factory set can be altered 

by the customer using an adjuster (Belimo ZEV). 


The VAV Compact controls the set volume flow, between 

V · min and V · max, from the control signal according to the 

characteristic shown opposite. Override shut off is possible. 


By wiring the control signal input terminal via switch contacts, 

constant volume flows V · min and V · max, and override 

control can be achieved. 

Control Signal Range Limiting 

For settings between V · min = 0 % and V · max = 100 %, the 

control signal must be limited in the DDC outstation. In 

this case, the full published volume range can be used 

for future adjustment via the BMS. If the design volume 

flow rates are set in the unit, a full voltage signal range of 

0-10 VDC or 2-10 VDC can be used. However, these settings 

can only be changed by using the Belimo ZEV 

which involve gaining access to the terminal box.



V · max Formula 

V · min Formula 

ZEV Adjuster 

V · max set value = V· max 

V · nom 

V · min set value = V· min 

V · max 

Operating mode selector 

knob 



Reset (Trox values) 

Volume flow % of ‡ nom 

. 100 % 

. 100 % 

Status display (LED) 

Set-button 

Control circuit state 


4 

Volume Flow Control Tolerances 

The volume flow controller works independently of the 

duct pressure, which means that pressure fluctuations do 

not cause permanent volume flow changes. To prevent 

the volume flow control from becoming unstable, a dead 

zone is provided within which the damper is not moved. 

This dead zone, coupled with the measuring tolerances, 

produces a volume flow deviation AV shown opposite. 

If the conditions shown in the sales brochure (e.g. minimum 

pressure differential, inlet flow conditions, etc.) are 




set with a 10 VDC control signal or V · max overridecontrol. 

The setting range for adjustment using the ZEV unit is 

from 30 to max 100 %. The percentage figures relate to 

V · nom. 


The V · min value corresponds to the volume flow which 

V · min override control. V · min may be set between 0 and 

100 % 1) of V · max, using the ZEV. The percentage figures 

relate to theV · max volume flow setting. 

If V · min is set at 0 %, the damper will be moved to the 

CLOSED position with a control signal of 0 VDC (alternatively 

2 VDC) (leakage depends on the type of unit). 


The volume flow set values and the voltage ranges can 

be adjusted on site with the aid of the adjuster ZEV. To 

achieve this, the ZEV is connected to the controller or 

remote position via a cable. 

The calculated V · min and V · max values are set on the corresponding 

potentiometers. These settings are input to the 

controller when the set buttons are pressed. 

1) Possible from approx. Jan. 1997, previously 80 %



V 

100 10 75 30 95 36 270 108 342 

125 15 120 45 150 54 432 162 540 

160 25 200 75 250 90 720 270 900 

200 40 325 120 405 144 1170 432 1458 

250 60 490 185 615 216 1764 666 2214 

315 105 820 310 1025 378 2952 1116 3690 

400 170 1345 505 1680 612 4842 1818 6048 

· minpub. 

V · to 

to 

from V 

min- to 

pub. 

from 

· 1) 

nom 

1) to 

V 

2) 

· V 

nom 

· V max 

· min 

V · V max 

· min 

Size 

l/s m 3 /h 


B x H 

mm 

V · min-pub. 1) 

l/s m 3 /h 


to from 

200 x 100 45 170 65 215 162 612 234 774 

300 x 100 65 255 95 320 234 918 342 1152 

400 x 100 85 340 130 425 306 1224 468 1530 

500 x 100 105 430 160 535 378 1548 576 1926 

600 x 100 130 520 195 650 468 1872 702 2340 

200 x 200 85 330 125 415 306 1188 450 1494 

300 x 200 125 495 185 620 450 1782 666 2232 

400 x 200 165 660 250 825 594 2376 900 2970 

500 x 200 205 830 310 1035 738 2988 1116 3726 

600 x 200 250 1000 375 1250 900 3600 1350 4500 

700 x 200 290 1160 435 1450 1044 4176 1566 5220 

800 x 200 330 1320 495 1650 1188 4752 1782 5940 

300 x 300 185 735 275 920 666 2646 990 3312 

400 x 300 245 985 370 1230 882 3546 1332 4428 

500 x 300 305 1230 460 1535 1098 4428 1656 5526 

600 x 300 370 1480 555 1850 1332 5328 1998 6660 

700 x 300 430 1720 645 2150 1548 6192 2322 7740 

800 x 300 490 1960 735 2450 1764 7056 2646 8820 

900 x 300 555 2215 830 2770 1998 7974 2988 9972 

1000 x 300 620 2480 930 3100 2232 8928 3348 11160 

400 x 400 325 1305 490 1630 1170 4698 1764 5868 

500 x 400 410 1630 610 2040 1476 5868 2196 7344 

600 x 400 490 1960 735 2450 1764 7056 2646 8820 

700 x 400 570 2280 855 2850 2052 8208 3078 10260 

800 x 400 650 2600 975 3250 2340 9360 3510 11700 

900 x 400 735 2935 1100 3670 2646 10566 3960 13212 

1000 x 400 820 3280 1230 4100 2952 11808 4428 14760 

500 x 500 510 2030 760 2540 1836 7308 2736 9144 

600 x 500 610 2440 915 3050 2196 8784 3294 10980 

700 x 500 710 2840 1065 3550 2556 10224 3834 12780 

800 x 500 810 3240 1215 4050 2916 11664 4374 14580 

900 x 500 915 3655 1370 4570 3294 13158 4932 16452 

1000 x 500 1020 4080 1530 5100 3672 14688 5508 18360 

600 x 600 730 2920 1095 3650 2628 10512 3942 13140 

700 x 600 850 3400 1275 4250 3060 12240 4590 15300 

800 x 600 970 3880 1455 4850 3492 13968 5238 17460 

900 x 600 1100 4400 1650 5500 3960 15840 5940 19800 

1000 x 600 1220 4880 1830 6100 4392 17568 6588 21960 

700 x 700 990 3960 1485 4950 3564 14256 5346 17820 

800 x 700 1140 4560 1710 5700 4104 16416 6156 20520 

900 x 700 1280 5120 1920 6400 4608 18432 6912 23040 

1000 x 700 1420 5680 2130 7100 5112 20448 7668 25560 

800 x 800 1300 5200 1950 6500 4680 18720 7020 23400 

900 x 800 1460 5840 2190 7300 5256 21024 7884 26280 

1000 x 800 1620 6480 2430 8100 5832 23328 8748 29160 

900 x 900 1640 6560 2460 8200 5904 23616 8856 29520 

1000 x 900 1820 7280 2730 9100 6552 26208 9828 32760 

1000 x 1000 2020 8080 3030 10100 7272 29088 10908 36360 

5 

to V · nom 

V · min-pub. 1) 

to from to V · nom 

1) V · min = 0 is also possible 2) Only TVR Grey colored sizes not deliverable with NMV-D2 (torques too high)!


Volume flow 



∆V · in ± % 


100 5 5 

80 5 5 

60 7 7 

40 7 8 

20 9 14 

10 20 >14 

20 >14 

2) Operating modes U and F only 2 to 10 VDC 

3) It is possible to use a fixed value controller as master 


6 

Single-Duct Units 



TVZ-R / 160 / 00 / BC5 / E0 - 50 - 240 l/s 

TVZ-R / 160 / 00 / BC5 / M0 - 50 - 240 l/s 

TVZ-R / 160 / 00 / BC5 / S0 - 50 - 240 l/s 

TVZ-R / 160 / 00 / BC5 / F2 - 100 l/s 


E Individual 

M Master 

S Slave 

U Changeover 

F Constant 


Operating 

Mode 

E0; E2 

M2; M0 

S0; S2 

U2 3) 

F2 3) 


V · min set at required V· min 

V · max set at required V· max 

V · min set at 0 % 

V · max set at volume flow ratio to master 

controller 

V · min set at required volume flow 1 

(lower value) 

V · max set at required volume flow 2 

(higher value) 

V · min set at required volume flow 

V · max set at 100 %. 

V · min 


(standard range) 2) 


V · max




unit 


V · min- V 

unit 

· l/s m 

nom 

3 /h 

125 45 150 162 540 

160 75 250 270 900 

200 120 405 432 1458 

250 185 615 666 2214 

Volume Flow Tolerances TVM 1) 

V · nom 

Volume flow 

as % of V 

100 5 7 

80 5 10 

60 5 12 

40 7 15 

20 9 - 

10 20 - 

20 - 

· ∆V 

nom 

· in ± % 

TVMcold TVMtotal 7 

Dual-Duct Unit TVM 



V · warm 

V · cold 

TVM-R / 160 / BFC / M0 - 75 - 240 l/s 


TVM-R / 160 / BFC / F2 - 200 l/s 


E Individual 

M Master 

F Constant 


Operating 

Mode 

E0 

E2 

M0 

M2 

F0 

F2 





V · max set at required 

Volume flow (V · cold ) 


Cold duct controller Warm duct controller 

V · min set at required 

Volume flow V · warm 

V · max set at 100 %

Wiring Connections 

IMPORTANT 



specifications must be observed in the overall 

control system design, selection of the other control 

components and wire sizing. 

Service Signal 

Room 

temperature 

controller 

Suitable 

enclosure, 

terminal block 


8 

Nomenclature 



w 

z 

Input voltage for set volume flow U3 Input operating control 

U/pp Actual volume flow U5 and communication signal 

Wiring 








It is advisable that the signal line for connecting the 

adjuster ZEV is linked up in an easily accessible location. 

This means that ceiling panels do not need be removed in 

order to take measurements. Suitable locations include: 

Spare terminals in room temperature controller or wall 

mounted enclosure. 



the commissioning connection. 

IMPORTANT 

The commissioning connection will also work if the 

U5 signal is used for slave controls or monitoring. 

However, the U5 signal differs from the actual value 

when the ZEV unit is connected.



with Override Control CLOSED 

Supply Voltage 24 VAC, 

Input Voltage 0 to 10 or 2 to 10 VDC 

24 VAC 

Input voltage 2 to 10 VDC 

1) e.g. Diode 1N 4007 

RT Controller 

1 2 3 5 

NMV-D2 

Operating Mode E0, E2, M0, M2 

NMV-D2 


24 VAC 

(24 VDC) 

1) 

1 2 3 5 

RT Controller 

1 2 3 5 

NMV-D2 

Operating Mode E2, M2 

1 2 3 5 

NMV-D2 


1 

1 

1 

Override 

Control 

CLOSED 

Parallel 

connection 

of other 

controllers 

1 

Override 

Control 

CLOSED 

Parallel 

connection 

of other 

controllers 

9 

Variable Volume Flow Control 

The VAV Compact is connected to the 24 VAC mains. If 

the DDC outstation/controller is on the same mains network, 

the control signal can be applied through a single 

wire. If the mains networks are separate, the control 

signal is connected by two wires. The actual value signal 

for the volume flow can be used. 

It is possible to connect several VAV Compacts in parallel. 

Several volume flow controllers (supply or extract air) are 

run in parallel by one DDC outstation/controller. If the 

volume flow terminal units are of the same size and the 

V · min and V · max values are programmed the same, all units 

control the same volume flow. If there are different settings, 

the units conduct equal percentages. In this way, a 

ratio control between the supply and extract air controllers 

can be achieved. 

A volt free switch contact provided by the customer enables 

the variable volume flow control to be overridden 

and a CLOSED override control achieved. The control 

wire to the room temperature controller should be interrupted.

Constant Volume Flow Control 

Supply Voltage 24 VAC 

Input Voltage 2 to 10 VDC 

24 VAC 



24 VAC 

S1 

S2 

S3 

S4 

1) e.g. Diode 1N 4007 

1) 

1 2 3 5 

NMV-D2 

Operating Mode U2 

S2 

S3 

S4 

1) 

1 2 3 5 

NMV-D2 

Operating Mode E0 

Parallel 

connection of 

other controllers 

possible 

Parallel 

connection of 


possible 


10 

Changeover Mode 

By means of simple switching between the supply voltage 

connections and the control input z, override controls 

at various volume flow set values or Open/Closed 

damper positions are possible in constant volume flow 

operating mode. If several functions are combined, the 

contacts must be linked in relation to one another, to prevent 

a short circuit. 

Several volume flow controllers can also be operated by 

one switch, if there is a common ground wire and the 

control signal is connected in parallel. 

All Switches 

OPEN V 

· 

min 

S1 closed CLOSED 

S2 closed 

S3 closed 

V 

· 

max 

· 

VZS S4 closed CLOSED 


Designation Control 

CLOSED 

‡ min 

‡ max 

Damper Closed 

Constant Volume Flow ‡ min 

Constant Volume Flow ‡ max 

Constant Volume Flow 

Intermediate setting 

VZS =(Vmax-Vmin) . ‡ ZS · · · 

0.5+V 

· 

min 

• Override Control “Damper OPEN” possible 

if required 

• Constant Volume Flow with DC-Supply Voltage is 

not recommended


Slave Control 

24 VAC 

(24 VDC) 

RT-Controller 

Master Controller NMV-D2 

Operating Mode M 

Slave Controller NMV-D2 


Dual Duct Terminal Unit TVM 

24 VAC 

(24 VDC) 

RT-Controller 

Cold Controller NMV-D2 

Warm Controller NMV-D2 

Operating Mode E, M, F 

To possible 

slave controller 

11 


If the units are controlled in parallel, there may be an 

incorrect difference in volume between the supply and 

extract air flows, if the pressure in one duct region is too 

low. It is therefore more beneficial to use the actual 

volume flow value, usually that of the supply air flow, as 

the control signal for the slave volume flow controller. If 

the extract air flow is not to be controlled by the DDC 

controller, a slave control is also used. 

A ratio control can be achieved using the VAV Compact, 

i.e. extract and supply air flows are in the same ratio to 

one another under all operating conditions. 

V · max Supply 

V · V 

min Supply 

· max Extract 

V · = 

min Extract 

The volume flow ratio is set on the slave controller as 

follows: 

V · max Extract 

V · V 

· 

max set value = 

max Supply 

. V· nom Supply 

V · nom Extract 

. 100 % 

If the volume flows are the same, the setting will be 

100 %. The setting range is up to max. 100 % (up to 

120 % via factory software). 


Two VAV Compacts are necessary in order to control a 

dual duct terminal box type TVM. 

The room temperature controller controls the cold duct 

volume flow controller. In most cases, the proportion of 

warm air is increased in the heating cycle from 0 to the 

required V · min. The warm duct controller (V · total is measured) 

is therefore set as a constant volume controller and 

does not require a control signal.

Function Test 

Check wiring 



Input control voltage for V · min 

Record the actual value signal U 5 

Input control voltage for V · max 



Supply voltage within Belimo 

specifications? 

yes 

Actual value signal U5 consistent? 

yes 

Actuator opens and 

closes? 

yes 


yes 


yes 

Set volume flow signal? 

yes 


Check transformer, 

etc. 


Damper 

obstructed? 

Duct pressure 

sufficient? 

Measuring tubes to 


damaged? 

Packing materials 

removed? 


controller 

Check window 


Sample Order Replacement Controller 

Belimo NMV-D2, 

preset for TVR / 125 / E0 - 140 - 300 m 3 /h 

voltage range 0 to 10 VDC, replacement for NMV24-D/NMV-D2 

no 

no 

no 

no 

no 

no 

no 


12 

Commissioning 

The functional check prior to commissioning cannot be 

carried out without the signal controller (DDC). The DDC 

controller is used to set a particular volume flow. 

The actual volume flow is calculated from the monitored 

actual value signal and compared with the set value. 

In many cases, incorrect wiring can be the reason for 

malfunction. Therefore a close examination of all connections 

should be made. Connections to wires 3 to 5 

should be disconnected before the following checks are 

made: 


opened manually, the voltage U 5 must increase. The 

volume flow control is checked by setting a control voltage 

on wire 3 to which the monitored value must correspond 

after a short time, within ± 0.1V. 

Actuate the operating control and test the desired functions. 

The functional check can be simplified using the adjuster 

ZEV. The set volume values V · min and V · max can be read. 

Furthermore, the ZEV indicates whether the monitored 

value agrees with the set value. 


As a general rule, controllers intended for replacement 

must be calibrated for the terminal box type and size of 

unit. When ordering the replacement controller, V · min and 

V · max must be indicated. Controllers which have not been 

set can only be accepted as a temporary solution.

Belimo VAV-Compact NMV-D2M 

1 

Contents 

Subject Page 

Areas of Application 2 




Volume Flow Ranges Single-duct Units 5 

Order Code, Examples, Single-duct Units 6 

Dual-duct Unit TVM 7 

Wiring Connections 8 

Variable Volume Flow Control 9 

Constant Volume flow Control 10 



Design changes reserved · All rights reserved · ® Gebrüder Trox GmbH (02/2002) · Leaflet No. E016KM1

VAV-Compact, NMV-D2M 

2 

1 

3 

1 NMV-D2M 

2 Tube connection for transducer 


4 Connection service unit 

5 Connection cable 

6 Shaft clamp 

7 Direction of rotation display 

8 Rotation limiter 


Room temperature controller, 

DDC-outstation etc. 

Set- 

Volume flow 


Volume flow 

control setting 

Set- 

Volume flow 

Actual 

Volume flow 

NMV-D2M 

Slave controller, 

monitoring, etc. 

Actual 

Volume flow 

NMV-D2M 


The VAV Compact NMV-D2M from Belimo is a complete 

control unit designed for VAV volume flow control units. 

The dynamic differential pressure transducer, damper 

actuator and electronic controls are combined in one 

housing. There are two operating modes available for the 

control function. For variable volume flow control, a suitable 

room temperature controller (alternatively, an air 

quality controller or similar) or a DDC outstation must be 

used. The control signal provides the volume set point. 

Switches or relays are used for constant volume flow 

control with up to 3 set values. 

6 

7 

8 

4 

5 


2 

The actual value of the volume flow is output as a standard 

linear, electrical signal. The voltage range for the 

actual and set values is standardised at 0 to 10 VDC. 

Using the ZEV setting unit, the customer can change to 

2 to 10 VDC. 

The volume flow is microprocessor-controlled on a digital 

basis. The VAV Compact has no potentiometer or 

switches, because all the parameters, including V · min and 

V · max, are stored in memory. Trox supplies the controller 

with all the parameters set. The volume flow can be 

changed by the customer easily and reliably using an 

adjuster (Belimo ZEV) and certain parameters can be 

read. 

Several controllers can be connected to a common room 

temperature controller for parallel operation. Supply/ 

extract air slave circuits can be provided. 

Standard filtration in air-conditioning systems allows the 

use of the NMV-D2 in the supply air without dust protection 

filters. Since a small volume flow is passed through 

the transmitter in order to monitor the volume flow, the 

following must be noted: 




or contains aggressive media, the NMV-D2M 

should not be used. 


The VAV Compact acts as a volume flow controller. The 

external room temperature controller determines the control 

signal used for volume set point. The actual value of 

the volume flow can be monitored as an option. The 

room temperature controller must have at least one analogue 

output. 


By means of simple switches, the VAV Compact can be 

set at the programmed set values or the OPEN or 

CLOSED damper position. Relay circuits or a controller 

(DDC outstation) enable a changeover to be made. The 

controller must have corresponding outputs which switch 

accordingly. The actual value of the volume flow can be 

monitored. 

PP/MP-Bus Function and Integration 

in LONWORKS ® -Systems (on Site) 

The VAV-Compact NMV-D2M incorporates the Belimo 

MP-Bus system which allowsup to 8 VAV units to be 

linked together in a very simple way and in the following 

systems: 

• LONWORKS ® -Systems in connection with Belimo interface 

UK24LON 

• DDC controllers with integrated MP-Bus interface 

For more information please contact Belimo!



Volume flow 


V · actual = V· nom 


Volume flow 

‡ nom 

(100 %) 

‡ min unit 

U 5 

10 

V · actual = V· U5-2 nom 

8 


V · set = U 3 

10 (V· max - V · min) + V · min 

Actual value signal U 5 

‡ nom 

V . 

min unit 

Control signal U 3 

V · set = U 3 - 2 

8 

Adjustment range 

(V · max -V · min)+V · min 

3 



pressure principle. The effective pressure (∆p w) of the differential 

pressure sensor in the volume flow terminal unit 

enables a partial volume flow passing through the transmitter 

to be detected and measured. Two temperaturedependent 

resistors are used to measure this partial 

volume flow, which is proportional to the total volume 

flow, linearised, and temperature compensated. The 

volume flow is calculated by the controller's microprocessor. 

The characteristic of the effective pressure is calibrated 

in the controller, so that linearisation can be executed 

by the microprocessor. The actual volume flow can 

be monitored as the voltage signal U 5 The measuring 

range is set to suit each unit size during factory calibration, 

so that the maximum rated volume flow (V · nom) is 

always 10 VDC. 


controller or by switch contacts. The controller determines 

the set volume flow in accordance with the characteristic 

shown opposite and compares this with the 

actual value. The damper actuator is controlled according 

to the deviation. The volume flow values V · min and 

V · max which are parameters are factory set can be altered 

by the customer using an adjuster (Belimo ZEV). 


The VAV Compact controls the set volume flow, between 

V · min and V · max, from the control signal according to the 

characteristic shown opposite. Override shut off is possible. 


By wiring the control signal input terminal via switch contacts, 

constant volume flows V · min and V · max, and override 

control can be achieved. 

Control Signal Range Limiting 

For settings between V · min = 0 % and V · max = 100 %, the 

control signal must be limited in the DDC outstation. In 

this case, the full published volume range can be used 

for future adjustment via the BMS. If the design volume 

flow rates are set in the unit, a full voltage signal range of 

0-10 VDC or 2-10 VDC can be used. However, these settings 

can only be changed by using the Belimo ZEV or 

MFT-H which involve gaining access to the terminal box.



V · max Formula 

V · min Formula 

ZEV Adjuster 

Volume flow % of ‡ nom 

V · max set value = V· max 

V · nom 


V · max 

Operating mode selector 

knob 



Reset (Trox values) 

. 100 % 

. 100 % 

Status display (LED) 

Set-button 

Control circuit state 


4 

Volume Flow Control Tolerances 


duct pressure, which means that pressure fluctuations do 

not cause permanent volume flow changes. To prevent 

the volume flow control from becoming unstable, a dead 

zone is provided within which the damper is not moved. 

This dead zone, coupled with the measuring tolerances, 

produces a volume flow deviation AV shown opposite. 

If the conditions shown in the sales brochure (e.g. minimum 

pressure differential, inlet flow conditions, etc.) are 




set with a 10 VDC control signal or V · max overridecontrol. 

The setting range for adjustment using the ZEV unit is 

from 30 to max 100 %. The percentage figures relate to 

V · nom. 


The V · min value corresponds to the volume flow which 

V · min override control. V · min may be set between 0 and 

100 % of V · max, using the ZEV. The percentage figures 

relate to theV · max volume flow setting. 

If V · min is set at 0 %, the damper will be moved to the 

CLOSED position with a control signal of 0 VDC (alternatively 

2 VDC) (leakage depends on the type of unit). 


The volume flow set values and the voltage ranges can 

be adjusted on site with the aid of the adjuster ZEV. To 

achieve this, the ZEV is connected to the controller or 

remote position via a cable. 

The calculated V · min and V · max values are set on the corresponding 

potentiometers. These settings are input to the 

controller when the set buttons are pressed. 

IMPORTANT 

The Service unit ZEV can’t display the actual mode 

but mode changing is possible. 

Service Unit MFT-H and PC Software Tool 

The Belimo Service unit MFT-H and the PC software Tool 

offers further functions and possibilities. 

For more information please contact Belimo!



V 

100 10 75 30 95 36 270 108 342 

125 15 120 45 150 54 432 162 540 

160 25 200 75 250 90 720 270 900 

200 40 325 120 405 144 1170 432 1458 

250 60 490 185 615 216 1764 666 2214 

315 105 820 310 1025 378 2952 1116 3690 

400 170 1345 505 1680 612 4842 1818 6048 

· minunit 

V · to 

to 

from V 

min- to 

unit 

from 

· 1) 

nom 

1) to 

V 

2) 

· V 

nom 

· V max 

· min 

V · V max 

· min 

Size 

l/s m 3 /h 


B x H 

mm 


l/s m 3 /h 


to from 

200 x 100 45 170 65 215 162 612 234 774 

300 x 100 65 255 95 320 234 918 342 1152 

400 x 100 85 340 130 425 306 1224 468 1530 

500 x 100 105 430 160 535 378 1548 576 1926 

600 x 100 130 520 195 650 468 1872 702 2340 

200 x 200 85 330 125 415 306 1188 450 1494 

300 x 200 125 495 185 620 450 1782 666 2232 

400 x 200 165 660 250 825 594 2376 900 2970 

500 x 200 205 830 310 1035 738 2988 1116 3726 

600 x 200 250 1000 375 1250 900 3600 1350 4500 

700 x 200 290 1160 435 1450 1044 4176 1566 5220 

800 x 200 330 1320 495 1650 1188 4752 1782 5940 

300 x 300 185 735 275 920 666 2646 990 3312 

400 x 300 245 985 370 1230 882 3546 1332 4428 

500 x 300 305 1230 460 1535 1098 4428 1656 5526 

600 x 300 370 1480 555 1850 1332 5328 1998 6660 

700 x 300 430 1720 645 2150 1548 6192 2322 7740 

800 x 300 490 1960 735 2450 1764 7056 2646 8820 

900 x 300 555 2215 830 2770 1998 7974 2988 9972 

1000 x 300 620 2480 930 3100 2232 8928 3348 11160 

400 x 400 325 1305 490 1630 1170 4698 1764 5868 

500 x 400 410 1630 610 2040 1476 5868 2196 7344 

600 x 400 490 1960 735 2450 1764 7056 2646 8820 

700 x 400 570 2280 855 2850 2052 8208 3078 10260 

800 x 400 650 2600 975 3250 2340 9360 3510 11700 

900 x 400 735 2935 1100 3670 2646 10566 3960 13212 

1000 x 400 820 3280 1230 4100 2952 11808 4428 14760 

500 x 500 510 2030 760 2540 1836 7308 2736 9144 

600 x 500 610 2440 915 3050 2196 8784 3294 10980 

700 x 500 710 2840 1065 3550 2556 10224 3834 12780 

800 x 500 810 3240 1215 4050 2916 11664 4374 14580 

900 x 500 915 3655 1370 4570 3294 13158 4932 16452 

1000 x 500 1020 4080 1530 5100 3672 14688 5508 18360 

600 x 600 730 2920 1095 3650 2628 10512 3942 13140 

700 x 600 850 3400 1275 4250 3060 12240 4590 15300 

800 x 600 970 3880 1455 4850 3492 13968 5238 17460 

900 x 600 1100 4400 1650 5500 3960 15840 5940 19800 

1000 x 600 1220 4880 1830 6100 4392 17568 6588 21960 

700 x 700 990 3960 1485 4950 3564 14256 5346 17820 

800 x 700 1140 4560 1710 5700 4104 16416 6156 20520 

900 x 700 1280 5120 1920 6400 4608 18432 6912 23040 

1000 x 700 1420 5680 2130 7100 5112 20448 7668 25560 

800 x 800 1300 5200 1950 6500 4680 18720 7020 23400 

900 x 800 1460 5840 2190 7300 5256 21024 7884 26280 

1000 x 800 1620 6480 2430 8100 5832 23328 8748 29160 

900 x 900 1640 6560 2460 8200 5904 23616 8856 29520 

1000 x 900 1820 7280 2730 9100 6552 26208 9828 32760 

1000 x 1000 2020 8080 3030 10100 7272 29088 10908 36360 

5 

to V · nom 


to from to V · nom 

1) V · min = 0 is also possible 2) Only TVR Grey colored sizes not deliverable with NMV-D2M (torques too high)!


Volume flow 



∆V · in ± % 


100 5 5 

80 5 5 

60 7 7 

40 7 8 

20 9 14 

10 20 >14 

20 >14 

2) It is possible to use a fixed value controller as master 


6 




TVZ-R / 160 / 00 / BC0 / E0 - 50 - 240 l/s 

TVZ-R / 160 / 00 / BC0 / M0 - 50 - 240 l/s 

TVZ-R / 160 / 00 / BC0 / S0 - 50 - 240 l/s 

TVZ-R / 160 / 00 / BC0 / F2 - 100 l/s 


E Individual 

M Master 

S Slave 

U Changeover 

F Constant 


Operating 

Mode 

E0; E2 

M2; M0 

S0; S2 

U0; U2 2) 

F0; F2 2) 


V · min set at required V· min 

V · max set at required V· max 


V · max set at volume flow ratio to master 

controller 

V · min set at required volume flow 1 

(lower value) 

V · max set at required volume flow 2 

(higher value) 

V · min set at required volume flow 

V · max set at 100 % 

V · min 




V · max




unit 


V · min- V 

unit 

· l/s m 

nom 

3 /h 

125 45 150 162 540 

160 75 250 270 900 

200 120 405 432 1458 

250 185 615 666 2214 


V · nom 

Volume flow 

as % of V 

100 5 7 

80 5 10 

60 5 12 

40 7 15 

20 9 - 

10 20 - 

20 - 

· ∆V 

nom 

· in ± % 

TVMcold TVMtotal 7 

Dual-Duct Unit TVM 



V · warm 

V · cold 

TVM-R / 160 / BF0 / M0 - 75 - 240 l/s 


TVM-R / 160 / BF0 / F2 - 200 l/s 


E Individual 

M Master 

F Constant 


Operating 

Mode 

E0 

E2 

M0 

M2 

F0 

F2 





V · max set at required 

Volume flow (V · cold ) 



V · min set at required 

Volume flow V · warm 

V · max set at 100 %

Wiring Connections 

IMPORTANT 



specifications must be observed in the overall 

control system design, selection of the other control 

components and wire sizing. 


Room 

temperature 

controller 

NMV-D2M 

NMV-D2M 

Suitable 

enclosure, 

terminal block 


8 

Nomenclature 



w 

z 

Input voltage for set volume flow U3 Input operating control 

U/MP Actual volume flow U5 and communication signal 

Wiring 









adjuster ZEV is linked up in an easily accessible location. 

This means that ceiling panels do not need be removed in 

order to take measurements. Suitable locations include: 

Spare terminals in room temperature controller or wall 

mounted enclosure. 



the commissioning connection. 

IMPORTANT 

The commissioning connection will also work if the 

U5 signal is used for slave controls or monitoring. 

However, the U5 signal differs from the actual value 

when the ZEV unit is connected. 

NOTE 

When using MP bus system the NMV-D2M gets the input 

signal from DDC or BMS on the MP-connection (U/MP). 

An indication of actual volume flow rate with the U5 signal isn’t possible in this configuration. The actual 

volume flow rate is assigned by the communication into 

the DDC/BMS. 

When using MP bus the control units MFT-H or PC-Tool 

has to be connected central to the UK24LON and not to 

the NMV-D2M directly.



with Override Control CLOSED 

Supply Voltage 24 VAC, 

Input Voltage 0 to 10 or 2 to 10 VDC 

24 VAC 


1) e.g. Diode 1N 4007 

RT Controller 

1 2 3 5 

NMV-D2M 


NMV-D2M 


24 VAC 

(24 VDC) 

1) 

1 2 3 5 

RT Controller 

1 2 3 5 

NMV-D2M 


1 2 3 5 

NMV-D2M 


1 

1 

1 

Override 

Control 

CLOSED 

Parallel 

connection 

of other 

controllers 

1 

Override 

Control 

CLOSED 

Parallel 

connection 

of other 

controllers 

9 

Variable Volume Flow Control 

The VAV Compact is connected to the 24 VAC mains. If 

the DDC outstation/controller is on the same mains network, 

the control signal can be applied through a single 

wire. If the mains networks are separate, the control 

signal is connected by two wires. The actual value signal 

for the volume flow can be used. 

It is possible to connect several VAV Compacts in parallel. 


run in parallel by one DDC outstation/controller. If the 

volume flow terminal units are of the same size and the 

V · min and V · max values are programmed the same, all units 

control the same volume flow. If there are different settings, 

the units conduct equal percentages. In this way, a 

ratio control between the supply and extract air controllers 

can be achieved. 

A volt free switch contact provided by the customer enables 

the variable volume flow control to be overridden 

and a CLOSED override control achieved. The control 

wire to the room temperature controller should be interrupted.




24 VAC 

24 VAC 

1) e.g. Diode 1N 4007 

S1 

S2 

S3 

S4 



1) 

1 2 3 5 

NMV-D2M 


S2 

S3 

S4 

1) 

1 2 3 5 

NMV-D2M 


Parallel 

connection of 


possible 

Parallel 

connection of 


possible 


10 

Changeover Mode 

By means of simple switching between the supply voltage 

connections and the control input z, override controls 

at various volume flow set values or Open/Closed 

damper positions are possible in constant volume flow 

operating mode. If several functions are combined, the 

contacts must be linked in relation to one another, to prevent 

a short circuit. 

Several volume flow controllers can also be operated by 

one switch, if there is a common ground wire and the 

control signal is connected in parallel. 

Switch Switch Override Effect 

position controls 

S1 . . . S4 open V . min Constant Volume Flow V . min 

S1 closed CLOSED Damper closed 

S2 closed V . max Constant Volume Flow V . max 

Constant Volume Flow V . ZS 

S3 closed V . ZS interim position 

V . ZS = (V . max – V . min) · 0.5 + V . min 

S4 closed CLOSED Damper closed 

• Override Control “Damper OPEN” possible 

if required 

• Constant Volume Flow with DC-Supply Voltage is 

not recommended 

• Override controls with diodes not possible with 

supply voltage 24 VDC


Slave Control 

24 VAC 

(24 VDC) 

RT-Controller 

Master Controller NMV-D2M 


Slave Controller NMV-D2M 


Dual Duct Terminal Unit TVM 

24 VAC 

(24 VDC) 

RT-Controller 

Cold Controller NMV-D2M 

Warm Controller NMV-D2M 


To possible 


11 


If the units are controlled in parallel, there may be an 

incorrect difference in volume between the supply and 

extract air flows, if the pressure in one duct region is too 

low. It is therefore more beneficial to use the actual 

volume flow value, usually that of the supply air flow, as 

the control signal for the slave volume flow controller. If 

the extract air flow is not to be controlled by the DDC 

controller, a slave control is also used. 

A ratio control can be achieved using the VAV Compact, 

i.e. extract and supply air flows are in the same ratio to 

one another under all operating conditions. 

V · max Supply 

V · V 

min Supply 

· max Extract 

V · = 

min Extract 


follows: 

V · max Extract 

V · V 

· 

max set value = 

max Supply 

. V· nom Supply 

V · nom Extract 

. 100 % 


100 %. The setting range is up to max. 100 % (up to 

120 % via factory software). 


Two VAV Compacts are necessary in order to control a 

dual duct terminal box type TVM. 

The room temperature controller controls the cold duct 

volume flow controller. In most cases, the proportion of 

warm air is increased in the heating cycle from 0 to the 

required V · min. The warm duct controller (V · total is measured) 

is therefore set as a constant volume controller and 

does not require a control signal.

Function Test 

Check wiring 




Input control voltage for V · min 


Input control voltage for V · max 


Supply voltage within Belimo 

specifications? 

yes 

Actual value signal U5 consistent? 

yes 


closes? 

yes 


yes 


yes 


yes 


Check transformer, 

etc. 


Damper 

obstructed? 

Duct pressure 

sufficient? 

Measuring tubes to 


damaged? 


controller 

Check window 


Sample Order Replacement Controller 

Belimo NMV-D2M, 

preset for TVR / 125 / E0 - 45 - 100 l/s 

voltage range 0 to 10 VDC, replacement for NMV24-D/NMV-D2M 

no 

no 

no 

no 

no 

no 

no 


12 

Commissioning 

The functional check prior to commissioning cannot be 

carried out without the signal controller (DDC). The DDC 

controller is used to set a particular volume flow. 

The actual volume flow is calculated from the monitored 

actual value signal and compared with the set value. 

In many cases, incorrect wiring can be the reason for 

malfunction. Therefore a close examination of all connections 

should be made. Connections to wires 3 to 5 

should be disconnected before the following checks are 

made: 


opened manually, the voltage U 5 must increase. The 

volume flow control is checked by setting a control voltage 

on wire 3 to which the monitored value must correspond 

after a short time, within ± 0.1V. 

Actuate the operating control and test the desired functions. 

The functional check can be simplified using the adjuster 

ZEV or MFT-H. The set volume values V · min and V · max can 

be read. Furthermore, the ZEV indicates whether the 

monitored value agrees with the set value. 



set for the terminal unit type and size must be used. 


solution. The following must be specified when ordering 

a replacement controller: 


units, warm duct or cold duct controller 


• V · min and V · max 

• Voltage range 

• Delivery date of the faulty controller

Belimo Adjuster ZEV 

1 

Contents 

Subject Page 



Operation 3 

Design changes reserved · All rights reserved · ® Gebrüder Trox GmbH (12/2001) · Leaflet No. E016MM2

ZEV Adjuster 

9 

8 

� Mode - control knob 

� Mode Display LED 

� Setting knob 

for operating mode 

� ‡ max control knob 

� Display LED ‡ max 

� Set knob for 

‡ max setting 

� ‡ min control knob 1) 

Connection to NVM-D2 / VRD2 

7 

1 

12 

13 

2 

3 

4 

5 

10 11 

1) Setting range 0 to 100 % from February 1997 

2) As of approx. January 1998 no longer available 

24 VAC NMV-D2, VRD2 

ZEV 

6 

� Display LED w=x/w�x 

� Adapter with cable 

� Power cut-off 2) 

� Display LED ‡ min 

� Set knob for 

‡ min setting 

� Reset knob for 

‡ min /‡ max setting 

1 2 5 

1 2 5 

1 Earth, ground 

2 Power supply 24 VAC 

5 U/pp, output actual volume flow U 5 and 

communication signal 

2 

Areas of Application 


The Belimo ZEV control unit is designed for operating 

and servicing the Belimo VRD2 and NVM-D2 electronic 

volume flow controllers. On this device the customer's 

volume flow control parameters are easily visible and 

accessible (the NVM-D2 controller has no potentiometer). 

In the function test a light diode (LED) indicates whether 

the required volume flow has been reached. The set 

limit values, ‡ min and ‡ max, are read on the control knobs 

and can be reset if necessary. The operating mode of the 

NMV-D2 (VAV Compact) can also be set with the ZEV. 

The ZEV is connected to the controller to be tested. 

A separate power supply is not necessary. 


The control unit communicates by cable U5 with the 

controller to be tested. The respective parameters are 

located by the control buttons which incorporate light 

diodes. New values are set and sent to the controller, 

where they are stored in non-volatile memory. The factory 

set volume flow parameters ‡ min and ‡ max can be recalled 

by the reset button. This function does not apply to the 

operating mode. 

At times the control unit can become blocked. Pressing 

the button will shut off the power supply so that the ZEV 

can be initialized again. 

IMPORTANT 

As long as connection 5 is connected to the ZEV, the 

actual value output signal U5 will not correspond to 

the current value. If slave controllers or display devices 

are connected, greater differentials between 

supply air and extract air can be set and the correct 

values displayed. Disconnect when in doubt.


Condition: Parameters Located 

Display Volume Flow Actual Value 

LED lights up: Volume flow set 

LED flashes: Volume flow not set 

New Parameters 

Factory Setting Recall 

3 

Locating the Parameters 

• Applies to VRD2 and NMV-D2. 

• Connect ZEV. 

• Turn ‡ min control knob slowly backwards and forwards 

over the whole setting range until the appropriate LED 

lights up and remains on. 

• The value to be read corresponds to the currently 

stored value. 

• Repeat the procedure for ‡ max and the operating 

mode. 

If no setting ‡ min and ‡ max can be found and the LED 

does not light up, this value may lie outside the range 

(older ZEVs). The parameters can be changed and reset 

(to the outside value), but not the location. If all 3 LED's 

are flashing at irregular intervals a different operating 

mode has been programmed. (It is also possible to 

change the parameters here). 

Function Testing Volume Flow Control 

• Applies to VRD2 and NVM-D2. 


• Green LED flashes constantly (w=x): 

The current volume flow corresponds to the rated 

value and the damper goes into the required override 

position OPEN or SHUT. In this case the control circuit 

is functioning correctly. In some circumstances the 

damper is wide open and the volume flow is still too 

low. This indicates low duct pressure. 

• Green LED flashes (wx): 

The set volume is not reached yet. In some circumstances 

the damper is wide open and the volume flow 

is still too low. This indicates low duct pressure. 

It is not possible for the LED to show the size of the 

volume flow. 

Changing the Parameters 

• NMV-D2: All parameters. 

• VRD2: Only operating mode 0/2 to 10 VDC. 


• Set ‡ min control button at the required percentage 

value. 

• Press appropriate set button. 

• Appropriate LED lights up and indicates that the new 

programme has been accepted. 

• Carry out the procedure for ‡ max and the operating 

mode if necessary. 

The factory set values for ‡ min and ‡ max are reactivated 

by the RESET button. Any changes are lost. 

If the control unit becomes blocked – all LED’s behave 

illogically – press the power off button (terminal 2) until 

the green light goes out.

Staefa PRVU 

1 

Contents 

Subject Page 





Service Unit ZS 1 4 

Volume Flow Ranges Single Duct Units 5 

Order Code, Order Example, Single Duct Units 6 

Volume Flow Ranges 

Dual Duct Units TVM 7 

Order Code, Order Examples TVM 7 

Terminal Identification 8 

Supply Air/Extract Air Slave Control 9 

Supply Air/Extract Air Slave Control with TVM 9 


Design changes reserved · All rights reserved · ® Gebrüder Trox GmbH (12/2001) · Leaflet No. E016MF3

PRVU 

Characteristic Curve of Actual Value 

‡ nom 

Volume flow 

‡ min pub. 

6 

1 

3 

4 

� PRVU controller 

� LED Function control 

� Control value - potentiometer 

� Connection terminals 

� Tube connections for transducer 

� Service unit connection 

2 

D 1) 

‡ CMD 

actual = . ‡ Nom 

100 

0 0 Actual value command 

1) Data of actual value command 

4 

5 

Setting range 

100 % 

2 


Staefa PRVU 

The room temperature and volume flow controller Staefa 

PRVU is designed for use in volume flow controllers in 

VAV systems. The main control parameter, room temperature, 

is kept constant with the supply air volume flow 

as auxiliary parameter. 

The control circuits are digital with a microprocessor. The 

controllers can function independently. The Pronto bus 

can network the controller to a communication module or 

an adapter and so provide a link to a higher level system. 

The room temperature is measured by a room control 

unit which also allows the room occupant to make any 

necessary changes. The controller can function in 

various operating modes (comfort, standby), which can 

be set locally or via the Pronto bus. There is also a heating 

sequence. 

All control parameters including ‡ min and ‡ max are stored 

in non-volatile memory. The controllers are supplied by 

Trox with all parameters set. The service unit enables 

customers to change the volume flow easily and reliably. 

Supply and extract air slave systems are possible with 

further PRVUs. 

With normal filters in comfort air conditioning systems 

the controller can be used in the supply air without additional 

dust prevention measures. As a part of the volume 

flow passes through the transducer to detect volume 

flow, the following should be noted: 

• Always use the correct extract air filter when there 

is a heavy accumulation of dust in the rooms. 

• The PRVU cannot be used if the air is polluted by 

fibres, adhesive matter or aggressive media. 



pressure principle. The effective pressure (�pw) of the differential 

pressure sensor in the volume flow control unit 

allows a partial volume flow to be sensed. This volume 

flow, which is proportional to the total volume flow, is 

measured, temperature compensated and linearised by a 

thermal measuring process. The measurement range 

(control value) is adjusted at the factory to the size of the 

unit, so that 10 VDC corresponds to the unit nominal 

volume flow (‡ nom). 

The rated volume flow is set by the room temperature 

control circuit within the limits of ‡ max and ‡ min. This 

volume flow is compared with the actual value. The damper 

actuator is controlled according to the volume flow 

control deviation. The PRVU controller has a three point 

actuator adjusted to the controller.

Staefa PRVU 

Duct Pressure Independent Control 


1000 

Pa 

800 

600 

400 

200 

Ratio Control 

‡ max parameter = ‡nom 

‡ min parameter = 

CMD 44 = 

If < 0 add 100 

‡ min 

‡ nom 

Constant Differential Control 

CMD 44 = 

‡ min 

‡ S 

‡ M 

�‡ �‡ 

‡ S 

. 

‡ nomS 

‡ max 

. 

. 

‡ nomM 

‡ nomS 

- 

‡ M 

‡ nomM 

100 % 

100 % 

. 

‡ max 

20 40 60 80 100 

% of ‡ nom 

Volume flow 

50 

. 100 

3 



duct pressure, i.e. the fluctuations in pressure do not 

cause permanent changes in volume flow. 

To prevent the volume flow from becoming unstable a 

neutral zone (hysteresis) must be allowed, within which 

the damper blade does not move. This dead zone and 

the measurement tolerances lead to a volume flow deviation 

�‡ as shown in the diagram opposite. 

If the conditions mentioned in the leaflets (e.g. lowest 

pressure differential, supply air conditions) are not observed, 

larger deviations can be expected. 


The ‡ max value corresponds to the volume flow for a 

large room load. The values range from 0 to 100 %. 

Values over 97 % should not be entered. The percentage 

figures relate to ‡ nom. 


The ‡ min value corresponds to the volume flow for the 

smallest room load. ‡ min can be entered between 0 and 

100 % (max. 97 %). The percentage figures relate to 

‡ nom. 

It must be noted that, if the parameter is set at ‡ min = 

0 %, the damper should not shut tight as happens in 

override control. The controller closes the damper until 

the actual value is 0 % equals 0 l/s. A leakage flow rate is 

possible because of the dimensional tolerances. 

Slave Control 

PRVU can provide constant differential or ratio 

control. 

The master controller is set at the appropriate mode 

when initialized: 

Ratio control: Mode 3 

Differential control: Mode 2 

The slave controller is always set at Mode 0.

Service Unit ZS 1 

Parameters of Volume Flow Control 

Command 

L S 

38 

39 

40 

41 

44 

58 

59 

60 

61 

64 

PRVU 

ZS1 

Parameter 

‡ max H 

‡ min H 

‡ min K 

‡ max K 

Factor 

Control value setting 

potentiometer 

IMPORTANT 

The control value setting potentiometer should 

not be adjusted. 

Description 

Max. volume flow, heating (H) 

Min volume flow, heating (H) 

Min. volume flow, cooling (K) 

Max. volume flow, cooling (K) 

Differential and ratio 

4 


Staefa PRVU 


Customers can adjust the volume flow limit values only 

with the communication interface. This can be done 

locally by the ZS 1 service unit ZS 1 or centrally on the 

WSE communications unit at the control terminal. 

Setting Guide 

• The operation of the roll display service and the communication 

unit is basically the same. 

• Before each write function select Command 30 and 

“ENTER”. This loads the data for the whole group into 

the service unit and control unit. 

• The new rated parameters are calculated to the formula 

on page 3. 

• Changing the individual values does not affect the 

remaining volume flows. 

• It is possible to parameter larger ‡ min values than ‡ max 

and vice versa. The operator must ensure that programmes 

do not overlap. 

• For single duct systems (cold air only) Commands 

38 to 40 (58 to 60) are set at the same value. 

• The parameter for slave control (constant differential or 

ratio) is set on the master controller.

Staefa PRVU 

Volume Flow Ranges TVZ, TVA, TVR 

Size 

l/s m 3 /h 

V · min- 

V 

unit 

· 1) V 

nom 

· 2) 

max- 

V 

unit 

· 1) 

min- V 

unit 

· 2) 

maxunit 

V · nom 

3) 100 15 90 95 54 324 342 

125 20 145 150 72 522 540 

160 35 245 250 126 882 900 

200 50 395 405 180 1422 1458 

250 80 595 615 288 2142 2214 

315 130 995 1025 468 3582 3690 

400 215 1630 1680 774 5868 6048 


V · min-unit 1) V · min-unit 1) 

V · max-unit 2) V · max-unit 2) 

l/s m3 B x H 

/h 

mm 

V 

200 x 100 50 210 215 180 756 774 

300 x 100 75 310 320 270 1116 1152 

400 x 100 100 410 425 360 1476 1530 

500 x 100 125 520 535 450 1872 1926 

600 x 100 145 630 650 522 2268 2340 

200 x 200 95 405 415 342 1458 1494 

300 x 200 145 605 620 522 2178 2232 

400 x 200 195 800 825 702 2880 2970 

500 x 200 235 1005 1035 846 3618 3726 

600 x 200 305 1215 1250 1098 4374 4500 

700 x 200 330 1410 1450 1188 5076 5220 

800 x 200 400 1600 1650 1440 5760 5940 

300 x 300 220 895 920 792 3222 3312 

400 x 300 295 1195 1230 1062 4302 4428 

500 x 300 370 1490 1535 1332 5364 5526 

600 x 300 475 1795 1850 1710 6462 6660 

700 x 300 520 2090 2150 1872 7524 7740 

800 x 300 625 2375 2450 2250 8550 8820 

900 x 300 665 2690 2770 2394 9684 9972 

1000 x 300 780 3010 3100 2808 10836 11160 

400 x 400 410 1585 1630 1476 5706 5868 

500 x 400 505 1980 2040 1818 7128 7344 

600 x 400 635 2380 2450 2286 8568 8820 

700 x 400 710 2770 2850 2556 9972 10260 

800 x 400 845 3150 3250 3042 11340 11700 

900 x 400 915 3560 3670 3294 12816 13212 

1000 x 400 1035 3980 4100 3726 14328 14760 

500 x 500 615 2470 2540 2214 8892 9144 

600 x 500 740 2960 3050 2664 10656 10980 

700 x 500 865 3450 3550 3114 12420 12780 

800 x 500 990 3930 4050 3564 14148 14580 

900 x 500 1110 4440 4570 3996 15984 16452 

1000 x 500 1235 4950 5100 4446 17820 18360 

600 x 600 910 3550 3650 3276 12780 13140 

700 x 600 1060 4130 4250 3816 14868 15300 

800 x 600 1210 4710 4850 4356 16956 17460 

900 x 600 1360 5340 5500 4896 19224 19800 

1000 x 600 1515 5920 6100 5454 21312 21960 

700 x 700 1215 4810 4950 4374 17316 17820 

800 x 700 1385 5530 5700 4986 19908 20520 

900 x 700 1560 6210 6400 5616 22356 23040 

1000 x 700 1735 6900 7100 6246 24840 25560 

800 x 800 1610 6310 6500 5796 22716 23400 

900 x 800 1810 7100 7300 6516 25560 26280 

1000 x 800 2010 7875 8100 7236 28350 29160 

900 x 900 2065 7975 8200 7434 28710 29520 

1000 x 900 2300 8850 9100 8280 31860 32760 

1000 x 1000 2575 9800 10100 9270 35280 36360 

· nom 

V · nom 

1) V · min = 0 is also possible 2) Maximum 97 % of V · nom 3) Only TVR 

5

Volume Flow Control Deviations 1) 

Volume flow 

in % of V 

100 5 5 

80 5 5 

60 7 7 

40 7 8 

20 9 14 

15 20 >14 

20 >14 

· nom 

∆V · in ± % 

TVZ, TVA, TVR, TVRK, TVS TVJ 

1) Percentages relate to V · actual 

6 


Order Code / Order Example 

The constructions available can be found in the current 

price list. 

‡ min 

‡ max 

TVZ-R / 160 / 00 / SL7 / M - 50 - 240 l/s 

TVA-R / 160 / 00 / SL7 / S - 50 - 240 l/s 

TVR / 160 / 00 / SL7 / F - 200 l/s 

TVJ-R / 400 x 107 / 00 / SL7 / E - 200 - 400 l/s 


Operating 

mode 

E 

M 

S 

F 

Addressing 

CMD 

90 


E Individual 

M Master 

S Slave 

F Fixed 

Factory setting 

Mode = 0 

CMD 38, 39, 40: Required ‡ min 

CMD 41 : Required ‡ max 

Mode = 3 (Ratio control, standard) 

CMD 38, 39, 40: Required ‡ min 

CMD 41 : Required ‡ max 

CMD 44 : Ratio to Slave 

Mode = 0 

CMD 38, 39, 40: 0 

CMD 41 : 97 

Mode = 0 

CMD 38 to 41 : ‡ const 

Staefa PRVU 


Address as in order range 1 to 60. 

Unless specified the item no. of the 

order is used as the address. 

If more than 60 items, continue with 1.

Staefa PRVU 


Size ‡ minunit 

V ‡ Ref- 

Warm 

· l/s m 

nom 

3 /h 

1) 

‡ maxunit 

2) 

‡minunit 

V ‡ Ref- 

Warm 

· 1) 

‡ maxunit 

nom 

2) 

125 45 145 150 185 162 522 540 666 

160 75 245 250 305 270 882 900 1098 

200 120 395 405 425 432 1422 1458 1530 

250 185 595 615 615 666 2142 2214 2214 

Volume Flow Deviations TVM 3) 

Volume flow 


TVM cold 

∆V · in ± % 

TVM total 

100 5 7 

80 5 10 

60 5 12 

40 7 15 

30 8 17 

20 9 - 

15 20 - 

20 - 

1) Maximum 97% of ‡ nom 

2) The value ‡ ref is only used as reference to calculate the actual 

volume flow and if necessary for CMD 44 for supply air and 

extract air slave control. It is used in the formula as ‡ nom. 

3) Percentages relate to ‡ actual 

7 

Dual Duct Units TVM 

Order Code / Order Examples 

The constructions available can be found in the current 

price list. 

‡ warm 

‡ cold 

TVM-R / 160 / SM8 / E - 120 - 200 l/s 

‡ warm = ‡ cold 

TVM-R / 160 / SM8 / F - 150 l/s 


Operating 

mode 

E 

M 

F 

Adressing 

CMD 

90 


E Individual 

M Master 

F Fixed 


Cold Controller Warm Controller 

Mode = 0 

CMD 38, 39, 40: 0 

CMD 41: 

Required ‡ cold 

Mode = 0 (Master: 3) 

CMD 38 to 41: 

Required ‡ warm 

(Master: CMD 44: 

Ratio to Slave) 


Address as in order range 1 to 60. 

Unless specified the item no. of the 

order is used as the address. 

If more than 60 items, continue with 1.

Terminal Identification 

PRVU 

IMPORTANT 

The following diagrams show the important signals 

for volume flow control. The Staefa specifications 

must be observed when incorporating them into the 

whole control technology concept, selecting the control 

components and dimensioning the cable. Further 

switching is possible (Apply to Fa. Staefa). 

Room Temperature and Volume Flow Control 

with Override Control 

24 VAC 

Room control unit 

S1 


8 

Staefa PRVU 

Nomenclature 

1 Bus controller (pronto-Bus) 

2 Bus controller (pronto-Bus) 

3 Screening PBUS (optional) 

4 to 9 Connection room control unit 

10 Input control signal, Master or energy barrier 

12 Earth signal 

14 Technical earthing 

15, 16 Power supply 24 VAC 

17 Control signal 1: open 

18 Common for 3 point actuator 

19 Control signal: close 

25 Earth signal 

26 Output control signal to slave 

Wiring 

The controller and actuator are factory wired together. 

The power supply, room control unit and control signal to 

the extract air controller and any override switching are 

wired by the customer. 

Safety transformers must be used (EN 60 742). 

If several controllers are connected together by 

0-10 VDC signals, short circuits could be caused in the 

24 VAC network. It is recommended that a 24 VAC 

controller be defined as live and always applied to 

terminal 16. 


The PRVU includes the room temperature and volume 

flow circuit. The room temperature is measured by the 

room control unit which also enables the room occupant 

to make any adjustments. 

The parameters for the effect of room temperature control 

on the volume flow circuit are customer set. 


The customer can install a dead make and break contact 

to override the variable volume flow control. Several 

units can be controlled by one switch if there is a common 

earth line and the control signals are parallel 

switched. Switch S1 shuts off the damper completely. 

The customer sets the parameters.

Staefa PRVU 

Supply Air/Extract Air Slave Control 

24 VAC 

PRVU 

Master 

PRVU 

Slave 

Room 

control unit 

Supply Air / Extract Air Slave Control with 

Dual Duct Unit TVM 

24 VAC 

Operating mode M 

Cold Controller 

PRVU 

Warm Controller 

PRVU 

Room control unit 


M, E 


Extract Air 

Controller 


10 

TVM 

9 

Supply Air / Extract Air Slave Control 

In parallel controlled units an unwanted differential between 

supply air and extract air can arise if the pressure 

in a duct area is too low. Therefore it is preferable to use 

the volume flow actual value, mostly that of the supply 

air, as reference variable for the second volume flow controller. 

The actual value of the supply air volume flow is used as 

0 to 100 VDC X V signal to steer the extract air. A constant 

or percentage differential is set between the supply air 

and extract air. Ratio control or constant differential control 

is determined by the mode set on the master controller. 

The controller parameters are factory set so that the 

required values are achieved. The customer must ensure 

that the allocation of supply air and extract air units 

remains constant. 


The two controllers of the dual duct mixing boxes Type 

TVM (cold, warm) are wired by the customer according to 

the circuit diagram opposite (also the 24 VAC tie circuit). 

The room temperature sensor (room control unit) operates 

the cold controller. 

In most cases the proportion of warm air is increased 

from 0 to maximum to the required ‡ warm. The warm 

controller is therefore set as fixed command controller 

and requires no control signal (measured ‡ total). See 

Leaflet TVM for description of function and control diagram. 

Supply Air / Extract Air Slave Control with 


The actual value output signal XV of the warm controller 

is programmed to the total volume flow ‡ total. 

It can therefore be used in sequence switching as the 

control signal for the slave controller (extract air controller).

Function Test 

Trouble Shooting 

Connect wiring 

Switch on power supply 

Switch on air conditioning systems 

Function test 

according to Staefa documentation 

Power supply conforms 

to Staefa regulations? 

yes 

Actual value output 

signal constent? 

yes 


closes? 

yes 

Volume flow ‡ min ? 

yes 

Volume flow ‡ max ? 

yes 


Control? 

yes 

� � � � � � 

Override control? 


etc. 

Faulty transformer or 

controller? 

Motor rotation correct? 


Duct pressure 

sufficient? 

Tubing to transducer 

damaged? 

Protective covering 

removed? 

Check room 

temperature sensor 

Check window switch, 

etc. 


� 

no 

no 

no 

no 

no 

no 

no 

Staefa PRVU, 

set for TVR / 125 / M - 140 - 300 m3 /h 

� 

� 

� 

� 

� 

� 

� 

10 

Commissioning 

Staefa PRVU 

A rapid function test of the volume flow control can be 

carried out on systems with communication by rated/ 

actual value comparison. If there is no communication 

facility the volume flow circuit is functioning correctly 

when the actuator returns to its previous position once 

the damper blade is manually adjusted. 

If, for commissioning, the limit volume flows ‡ min and 

‡ max, must be proved, these must be set to the Staefa 

documentation. 

At every operation the theoretical actual value Command 

14 (Data to command 14) is read and the volume flow 

calculated to the formula on page 3. 

In many cases faulty wiring is the cause of malfunction. 

Therefore all customer wiring should be disconnected 

before the volume flow controllers are thoroughly 

checked. 

If the motor drive is overridden and the damper opened 

manually, the voltage at terminal 26 must first rise in relation 

to 25 (X V). The damper is closed again by motor control. 


Faulty controllers must be replaced with controllers parametered 

to the volume flow controller type and size. 

Name plate data must be supplied when ordering replacement 

controllers.

Staefa Actuator AS1D8 

1 

Contents 

Subject Page 

AS1D8 2 

Design changes reserved · All rights reserved · ® Gebrüder Trox GmbH (12/2001) · Leaflet No. E016MF2

AS1D8 


� Direction of rotation 

switch 


� Connecting cable 


2 

Actuator AS1D8 

Staefa Actuator AS1D8 

Application 

Maintenance free air damper actuator for volume control 

systems with Staefa volume flow controllers. 

Function 

The actuator is factory mounted on the damper shaft and 

wired. The integrated stroke angle limiter is adjusted. 

The drive is overload-protected. When the end stops are 

reached the motor stops automatically. 

The direction of the rotation is set by a switch (factory 

set). For manual adjustment of the damper the drive can 

be disconnected by a button.

Siemens Compact Volume Flow Controller 

VAV Static GLB181.1E/3 

1 

Contents 

Subject Page 

Applications 2 

Functions 3 

Characteristic curves 3 

Functions 3 

Pressure-independent control characteristics 4 

Volume flow control and adjustment 4 

Adjuster AST10 4 

Volume-flow range for single duct units 5 

Order codes for single duct units 6 

Volume flow ranges for dual duct units, 

Order codes 7 

Terminal connections, DIL switch settings 8 

Continuous controlling, Override control 9 

Examples of application 10 

Commissioning 11 

Design changes reserved · All rights reserved · ® Gebrüder Trox GmbH (12/2001) · Leaflet No. E016MS0

Compact Controller GLB181.1E/3 

2 

1 

3 

7 

1 Shaft clamp 


3 Position display 


5 Connecting cable 

6 Transducer tubing connector 

7 DIL switch (series A) 

Socket for AST10 connecting cable (series B) 

Operating Modes 

The GLB181.1E/3 has two operating modes, “CON” and 

“3P” (see circuit diagram below). 

Operating Mode “CON” 

Room temperature controller 

Required volume flow, 0 to 10 VDC 

GLB181.1E/3 



4 

6 

5 

2 

Applications 

The Siemens electronic volume flow controller 

GLB181.1E/3 is a control unit for VAV volume control 

units in VVS systems. The membrane pressure transducer 

and control electronics are integrated into one 

housing. For variable volume flow control, a suitable 

room termperature controller (or air quality controller), 

a DDC outstation or a similar device must be used. 

A 0 to 10 VDC signal or three-point signal (TEC controller, 

DESIGO RXC31.1 etc.) can be used as the voltage range. 

To do this, volume flow control is deactivated. Switches 

or relays with a maximum of 2 set points are used for 

constant volume flow control. 

The GLB181.1E/3 is not outfitted with adjustment knobs 

for performing V . 

min and V . 

max settings. All controller parameters 

are factory-set by Trox. The customer does not 

need to make any adjustments. As soon as the supply 

voltage and room temperature controller have been connected, 

the terminal unit is ready for use. 

Any volume flow changes that may be necessary can 

easily be carrried out by the customer with the AST10 

adjustment device. For parallel operation, several controllers 

can be connected up to one room temperature 

controller. Supply/extract air slave control can be 

realized. 


The actual value of the volume flow is monitored as a 

standard, linear electrical signal and can be switched to 

a DDC or used for the display. The voltage range for 

the actual and command value is standardized at 0 to 

10 VDC. Volume flow is measured with a membrane 

pressure transducer. In automatic, recovered zero point 

calibration via an integrated air valve, minimum flow 

briefly occurs in the measuring line. This flow level is so 

low that as a rule the measuring element is not soiled. 

However, if the unit is used in unclean air, a plastic or 

coated VAV should be used. 

IMPORTANT 

Make certain that in critical situations the VAV 

terminal unit and membrane pressure transducer 

are tested for the resistance of their materials to 

hazardous materials and particle concentrations in 

ambient air. 

Operating Mode “3P” 

Operator terminal with 

communication capability, DDC 

Actual volume flow 3-point signal 24 VAC 

0 to 10 VDC GLB181.1E/3 

Root extraction 

of transmitter 

signal 

Actuator



Characteristic Curve of the Actual Value Signal 

V · nom 

Volume flow 

V · min unit 

0 Actual value signal UC 10 VDC 

Characteristic Curve of the Command Variable 

Volume flow 

V · nom 

V · max 

V · min 

V · min unit 

V · req. = (V· max – V· min ) + V· Y 

min 

10 

0 Command signal Y 10 VDC 

3 

Functions 

The volume flow is measured with a membrane pressure 

transducer. The effective pressure of the differential pressure 

sensor in the terminal unit allows the detectionThe 

effective pressure ∆pw of the differential pressure sensor 

in the VAV terminal unit is measured in the membrane 

pressure transmitter of the GLB181.1E/3 and linearized. 

The volume flow is calculated by a microprocessor in the 

controller. 

The actual volume flow is available as a linear voltage 

signal U. The measurement range (reference value) is set 

during factory calibration to suit the unit size in such a 

way that 10 VDC always corresponds to the unit nominal 

volume flow rate (V . 

nom). 


controller or by switches. The controller determines the 

required volume flow in accordance with the characteristic 

curve shown in the illustration and compares this 

with the actual value. The external damper actuator is 

controlled according to the deviation. The factory-set 

volume flow ranges V . 

min and V . 

max can be altered by the 

customer using a Siemens AST10 adjuster, which can 

also be used to change the operating mode. 

IMPORTANT 

The operating mode must be set for each system 

because otherwise the desired function will not be 

available! 


Variable Volume Flow 

Using the command variables shown in the illustration 

as a basis, the GLB181.1E/3 calculates the volume flow, 

which can range from V . 

min to V . 

max. Override controls 

CLOSED or OPEN can be realized. 

Constant Volume Flow 

To realize override control as well as constant volume 

flows V . 

min and V . 

max, wire the input terminals for the command 

signal via relays or contacts. 

Command Signal Range Limiting 

In the DDC outstation, the command signal must be limited 

for settings between V . 

min = 0 % and V . 

max = 100 %. In 

this situation, the full published volume range can be 

used for parameterizing. If the desired volume flow rates 

are set in the unit, a standard voltage signal range of 

0-10 VDC can be used to control all units. However, 

these settings can only be changed individually by using 

the AST10, which involves gaining access to the terminal 

unit. 

(Operating Mode “3P”) 

In this operating mode, the internal controller electronics 

are inactivated. Only the reference value is factory set. 

Any parameterized V . 

min or V . 

max values have no impact on 

function.

Duct Pressure-independent 

Control Characteristics 


1000 

Pa 

800 

600 

400 

200 

Formula for V . max 

Formula for V . min 

Adjuster AST10 

9 

2 

1 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

% of V 

Volume flow 

· 20 40 60 80 100 

nom 

V · V 

max setting = 

V 

· 

nom 

· max 

V · min setting = V· min 

V · nom 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 



. 100 % 

. 100 % 

Liquid crystal display 

Plus/minus keys 

for changing parameters 

Cursor key 

(to toggle 

“Type” and “U”) 

Save key 

(to send data to the 

controller) 

Reset key 

for factory settings 

Rocker switch V . n 1) / V . min 

Rocker switch V . max / Y 

Not allocated (reserved 

for future applications) 

Socket for connecting cable 

(make certain that plug is 

inserted correctly) 

4 


The volume flow controller works independently of duct 

pressure, which means that pressure fluctuations result 

in only transient changes in volume flow. 

To prevent destabilization of volume flow control, a dead 

zone is provided within which the damper does not 

move. This dead zone, in conjunction with measuring 

tolerances, produces the volume flow deviation ∆V . 

illustrated here. 

If the conditions mentioned in the unit documentation 

are not met (e.g., lowest differential pressure, supply air 

conditions), larger deviations are likely to occur. 

V . max Setting 

The V . 

max value is the equivalent of the volume flow that is 

set with a 10 VDC command signal or V . 

max override control. 

The setting range for adjustments with the AST10 

adjuster is from 20 to 120 %. The percentage figures are 

based on V . 

nom. 

V . min Setting 

The V . 

min value is the equivalent of the volume flow that is 

set with a 0 VDC command signal or V . 

min override control. 

V . 

min may be set between –20 and 100 % of V . 

nom 

using the AST10. 

If V . 

min is set between –20 bis 0 %, the damper will be 

closed and leakproof with a command signal of 0 VDC. 

In case of value deviation, shut-off can be realized with 

input Y2 (see p. 9). 


The volume flow threshold ranges can be adjusted on 

site using adjuster AST10. To do this, connect the AST10 

to the controller (see AST10 product information). The 

calibrated V . 

min or V . 

max values can be set using the keys 

by the same names. The controller adopts these settings 

when the Set key is pressed. 

In 3P operating mode, the volume flow ranges can be 

changed only on operator terminals with communication 

capabilities (e.g., TEC). 

1) V . 

n equals V . 

nom



Volume Flow Ranges for TVZ, TVA, TVR, TVS, TVRK 

Size 

V · min-unit 

V · min-unit 

from to V from 

· nom 

to V · l/s m 

unit 

3 /h 

V · max 

V · max 

1002) 10 20 95 36 72 342 

125 15 30 150 54 108 540 

160 25 50 250 90 180 900 

200 40 80 405 144 288 1458 

250 60 125 615 216 450 2214 

315 105 205 1025 378 738 3690 

400 170 335 1680 612 1206 6048 

Volume Flow Ranges for TVJ/TVT 

B x H 

mm 

V · min 

l/s m3 /h 

V · V min 

· max 

V · min-unit 1) V · min-unit 1) 


· nom 

200 x 100 45 45 215 162 162 774 

300 x 100 65 65 320 234 234 1152 

400 x 100 85 85 425 306 306 1530 

500 x 100 110 105 535 396 378 1926 

600 x 100 130 130 650 468 468 2340 

200 x 200 85 85 415 306 306 1494 

300 x 200 125 125 620 450 450 2232 

400 x 200 165 165 825 594 594 2970 

500 x 200 205 205 1035 738 738 3726 

600 x 200 250 250 1250 900 900 4500 

700 x 200 290 290 1450 1044 1044 5220 

800 x 200 330 330 1650 1188 1188 5940 

300 x 300 185 185 920 666 666 3312 

400 x 300 245 245 1230 882 882 4428 

500 x 300 305 305 1535 1098 1098 5526 

600 x 300 370 370 1850 1332 1332 6660 

700 x 300 430 430 2150 1548 1548 7740 

800 x 300 490 490 2450 1764 1764 8820 

900 x 300 555 555 2770 1998 1998 9972 

1000 x 300 620 620 3100 2232 2232 11160 

400 x 400 325 325 1630 1170 1170 5868 

500 x 400 410 410 2040 1476 1476 7344 

600 x 400 490 490 2450 1764 1764 8820 

700 x 400 570 570 2850 2052 2052 10260 

800 x 400 650 650 3250 2340 2340 11700 

900 x 400 735 735 3670 2646 2646 13212 

1000 x 400 820 820 4100 2952 2952 14760 

500 x 500 510 510 2540 1836 1836 9144 

600 x 500 610 610 3050 2196 2196 10980 

700 x 500 710 710 3550 2556 2556 12780 

800 x 500 810 810 4050 2916 2916 14580 

900 x 500 915 915 4570 3294 3294 16452 

1000 x 500 1020 1020 5100 3672 3672 18360 

600 x 600 730 730 3650 2628 2628 13140 

700 x 600 850 850 4250 3060 3060 15300 

800 x 600 970 970 4850 3492 3492 17460 

900 x 600 1100 1100 5500 3960 3960 19800 

1000 x 600 1220 1220 6100 4392 4392 21960 

700 x 700 990 990 4950 3564 3564 17820 

800 x 700 1140 1140 5700 4104 4104 20520 

900 x 700 1280 1280 6400 4608 4608 23040 

1000 x 700 1420 1420 7100 5112 5112 25560 

800 x 800 1300 1300 6500 4680 4680 23400 

900 x 800 1460 1460 7300 5256 5256 26280 

1000 x 800 1620 1620 8100 5832 5832 29160 

900 x 900 1640 1640 8200 5904 5904 29520 

1000 x 900 1820 1820 9100 6552 6552 32760 

1000 x 1000 2020 2020 10100 7272 7272 36360 

5 

V · max 

to V · nom 

1) V · min = 0 can also be realized 2) TVR only Values highlighted in gray not allowable for TVT with GLB181.1E/3 due to high torque!


Volume flow 

as % of V 

100 5 5 

80 5 5 

60 7 7 

40 7 8 

20 9 14 

15 20 >14 

20 >14 

· nom 

∆V · in ± % 

TVZ, TVA, TVR, TVS, TVRK TVJ/TVT 


2) A constant value controller can be used as a master 

3) Indicate configurations for master and slave devices 

when ordering 



6 


Order Code / Ordering Example 


TVZ / 160 / 00 / LN0 / E - 50 - 240 l/s 

TVZ / 160 / 00 / LN0 / M - 50 - 240 l/s 

TVZ / 160 / 00 / LN0 / S - 240 l/s 

TVZ / 160 / 00 / LN0 / F - 100 l/s 


Operating 

mode 

E 

M 

S 

U 

F 2) 

2) 3) 

X V · nom set 

Factory settings 

V · min at required V · min 

V · max at required V · max 


V · min at 0 % 

V · max at volume flow ratio to master 

controller 

V · min at required volume flow 1 

(smaller value) 

V · max at required volume flow 2 

(larger value) 

V · min 

E Individual 

M Master 

S Slave 

F Constant value 

X 3-point 

V · min at required volume flow 

V · max at 100 % 

V · max 

3) 

3)



Volume Flow Ranges for TVM 

Size 


Volume flow 


V · min-unit 

1) Percentage figures based on ‡ actual 

l/s m 3 /h 

V · nom 

TVM cold 

V · min-unit 

∆V · in ± % 

100 5 7 

80 5 10 

60 5 12 

40 7 15 

20 9 - 

10 20 - 

20 - 

V · nom 

125 45 150 162 540 

160 75 250 270 900 

200 120 405 432 1458 

250 185 615 666 2214 

TVM total 

7 

Two Duct Combined Unit TVM 



TVM / 160 / LY0 / M - 50 - 240 l/s 

TVM / 160 / LY0 / F - 400 l/s 


Operating 

mode 

E 

M 

‡ min at – 5 % 

‡ max at required 

volume flow (‡ cold ) 



F ‡ min at – 5 % 


Constant volume 

flow 


E Individual 

M Master 

F Festwert 

X 3-point 

‡ min at required 

volume flow ‡ warm 

‡ max at 100 % 

X ‡ nom set ‡ nom set 

. 

Vwarm ‡ min at required 


flow 

‡ max at 100 % 

. 

Vcold . . 

Vwarm = Vcold


DIL Switch Settings, GLB181.1E (series A) 

DIL switch Function Remark 

3 (S3) 

1 and 2 (S1, S2) Not allocated 


GLB181.1E/3 series A 

GLB181.1E/3 series B 

24 VAC 

Motor rotational 

direction 

Room 

temperature 

controller 

GLB181.1E/3 series A 

24 VAC 

Room 

temperature 

controller 




Factory setting: 

DO NOT 

CHANGE! 

Switch cabinet 

or wall mounted 

enclosure 



enclosure 

8 

Nomenclature 

Key to wire Bedeutung 

wires Code colors 

G red Phase AC 24 V 

G0 black Ground AC 24 V 

Y1 purple Position signal “open” (3P) or 

override control (CON) 

Y2 orange Position signal “close” (3P) or 

override control (CON) 

Y (Series A) gray Volume flow position signal 

0 to 10 VDC and communication 

signal 

YC (Series B) gray Volume flow position signal 

0 to 10 VDC and communication 

signal 

UC (Series A) pink Actual value output signal 

0 to 10 VDC 

U (Series B) pink Actual value output signal 

0 to 10 VDC 

U (Series A) pink Communication signal, Series A 

Wiring 

Wiring for the 24 VAC voltage supply must be performed 

by the customer. Safety transformers are to be used 

(EN 60742). 

If several controllers are connected to one 24 VAC network, 

it is important to ensure that a common neutral or 

ground wire is used. 

Service Connection 

It is recommended that the signal line for connecting the 

AST10 adjuster be linked up in an easily accessible 

location. This avoids having to remove ceiling panels 

when service is performed. Suitable locations include: 

spare terminals in room temperature controllers, or wall 

mounted enclosures. 

It is important to ensure that G and G0 are available. 

Therefore, a 4-wire connection is required to the commissioning 

point connection. 

IMPORTANT 

Series A and B are connected differently. Follow the 

relevant recommendations in the documentation for 

adjuster AST10.



Continuous Controlling between V . min and V . max 


24 VAC 

Command 

signal 

0 to 10 VDC 

G G0 Y1 Y2 YC Y UC U 


Actual value 

of output signal 

0 to 10 VDC 

Controlling with an External Digital Operator Terminal, 

Room Temperature Volume Flow Cascade 


24 VAC 

G 

G0 


Digital Digitaleroperator Einzelraumregler terminal 

G G0 


24 VAC 

S1 S2 

Y1 Y2 U 

G G0 Y1 Y2 YC U 


9 

Variable Volume Flow Controlling 

The GLB 181.1E/3 is connected to the 24 VAC grid. If the 

DDC outstation/controller is in the same grid, the command 

signal can be applied through a single wire. If the 

grids are separate, the command signal is connected by 

two wires. The actual value signal for the volume flow 

can be used. 

Several GLB181.1E/3 units can be connected in parallel. 


operated in parallel by one room temperature controller. 

If the terminal units are the same size and V . 

min and V . 

max 

parameters are set at the same values, all the units control 

the same volume flow. If the settings differ, the units 

control an equal proportion of flow. This allows ratio 

control to be achieved between the supply and extract 

air controllers. 

The variable volume flow control can be overridden 

for shut-off and startup using zero-potential switches 

(supplied by customer). 

Function 

S1 

Switch 

S2 

(window 

switch) 

Cont. controlling open open 

Shut-off open closed 

Fully open closed open 

Controlling V . min open open 

Controlling V . max closed closed 



Type 

of controlling 

VVS, 

supply or 

extract air 

KVS, 

supply or 

extract air

Slave Control 

24 VAC 

G 

G G0 Y1 Y2 

Raumtem- 

Room 

temperature 

peratur-Regler 

controller 


G 

G0 

G0 

Y1 Y2 YC U 

Outstation/Controller 


Outstation/Controller 


24 VAC 

G 

Y 

YC U 

Raumtem- Room 

temperature 

peratur-Regler 

controller 


G 

G0 

G0 

Y1 Y2 YC U 

Cold Duct Controller 


Warm Duct Controller 




Y 

possibly to slave controller 

10 

Supply or Extract Air Slave Control 

In the case of parallel control of the units, an unfavorable 

difference between supply and extract air can occur if 

the pressure in one duct is too low. Therefore, the more 

favorable actual volume flow value (usually of the supply 

air) should be used as the command variable for the 

second volume flow controller. If the extract air flow is 

not to be controlled by the DDC controller, a slave control 

is also used. 

Ratio control can be achieved using the GLB181.1E/3 i.e. 

the reatio of extract air to supply air must be the same 

ratio under all operating conditions. 

‡ max M 

‡ min M 

‡ max S 

‡ min S 


follows: 

‡ max setting = 


100 %. The maximum setting is 120 %. 

= 

‡ max S 

‡ max M 


The two controllers fitted to the dual duct unit TVM (cold 

duct, warm duct) are to be wired by the customer as illustrated 

in the circuit diagram on this page (including the 

24 VAC/VDC cross-connection). 



In most instances, the proportion of warm air is increased 

from 0 to the required V . 

warm as a maximum set point. 

The warm duct controller (V . 

total is measured) is therefore 

set as a constant value controller and does not require a 


For more information and a control diagram, refer to the 

TVM product documentation. 

· 

‡ nom M 

‡ nom S 

· 100 %



Commissioning Commissioning 

Check wiring 

Activate power supply 

Switch on air conditioning system 

Record actual value signal U for override 

control V . min . Record the actual value signal U 

Record actual value signal U for override 

control V . max . Record the actual value signal U 

Fault Diagnosis 

Supply voltage in conformance 

with Siemens specifications? 

yes 

Signal U consistent? 

yes 

Actuator opens 

and closes? 

yes 

Volume flow V . min? 

yes 

Volume flow V . max? 

yes 

Volume flow 

command signal? 

yes 


no 

no 

no 

no 

no 

no 

no 


etc. 


Damper 

obstructed? 

Duct pressure 

sufficient? 

Measurement 

tubing to the 

transducer 

damaged? 


controller 

Check window 

switch, relays etc. 

Ordering Example for a Replacement Controller 

Siemens GLB181.1E/3, 

calibrated for TVR / 125 / E0 - 45 - 100 l/s 

11 

A function test for commissioning can be carried out 

using adjuster AST10 or the DDC outstation/controller. 

A defined volume flow is set for both of these units. 

The actual volume flow is calculated on the basis of the 

monitored actual value signal and is compared with the 

set value. 

In many instances, the faults can result from incorrect 

wiring. Therefore, when checking an individual volume 

flow controller, first disconnect all lines except for G and 

G0. 

The power supply is then switched off and a zero point 

comparison is performed automatically. The actual output 

signal is then set to zero for about 2 minutes. 

If the actuator drive is disengaged and the damper is 

opened manually, the voltage U will increase. Then briefly 

disconnect the supply voltage so that the actuator can 

be resynchronized. 

Volume flow control is checked by setting a command 

signal to which the monitored value must correspond 

after a short time.Set points are defined by a linear voltage 

signal, a switch or adjuster AST10. 

Apply the override control and test the desired functions. 

The function test can be simplified using the AST10 

adjuster. The function test can be simplified using the 

AST10 adjuster. The set volume values V . 

min and V . 

max 

can be read. The AST10 can also simulate a command 

signal. Operating mode and direction of flow in the 

actuator are displayed. The Trox factory settings can 

be restored with the “Factory settings” key. 

Replacement Controllers 

When replacing faulty controllers, controllers calibrated 

to the terminal unit type and size must be used. Noncalibrated 

controllers may only be used as a stopgap 

solution. 


controller: 

• Unit type and size; for TVM units: whether the unit 

is a cold or warm duct controller. 


• V . 

min and V . 

max

Siemens Adjuster AST10 

1 

Contents 

Subject Page 

Application 2 

Function 2 

Information regarding operation and use 3 

Table of parameters 3 

Operation the unit 3 

Mounting 4 

Connection to GLB... 4 


AST10 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

1 Liquid crystal 

display 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

Plus/minus key to change parameters 

Cursor key (toggles “Type”, “U” and “DIR”) 

“Save” key (to send data to the controller) 

“Reset” key to restore factory settings 

Rocker switch V . 

n / V . 

min 

Rocker switch V . 

max / Y 

Not allocated (reserved for future application) 

Connecting cable 

2 


Application 

The adjuster AST10 is used to display and set parameters 

for Siemens compact controllers GLB181.1E/3 

and GDB 181.1E/TR. As the compact controllers are 

not outfitted with a trim potentiometer, the AST10 is used 

to render the parameters accessible and to visualize 

them. 

Functions 

The AST10 is connected to the GLB181.E/3 using one of 

the included connecting cables (GLB... A with clipped 

connection, GLB... B with plug-in or clipped connection). 

Power is supplied to the AST10 via the connecting cable. 

Values are shown on a liquid crystal display (LCD). The 

AST10 is operated with four keys, two of which are dual 

function rocker switches. 

“Srch” is displayed when communication is interrupted 

and during the startup process while the unit carries out 

a search to determine which type of device is attached. 

Values that are altered will blink in the display. After 

changing a parameter, send the new value to the connected 

unit by pressing the “Set” key. The value will 

then stop blinking. 

The Trox factory settings for the GLB181.1E/3 can be 

restored by pressing the “Factory settings” key. 

Any communication problems with the connected device 

are signaled by the message “Err” in the LCD.


Table of Parameters 

Symbol 

V 

Key Meaning Application 

. n V . V 

n Display of Vnom volume flow Factory setting, 

read only! 

. min [%] V . V 

min Setting or display of minimum volume flow – 20 to 100 % in 1 percent increments 

. max [%] V . max Setting or display of maximum volume flow 20 to 120 % in 1 percent increments 

YC [V] Y Setting or display of required volume flow 0 to 11 V in 0.05 V increments 

DIR Setting or display of direction of rotation of motor Factory setting, DO NOT CHANGE! 

Factory setting, 

only change if absolutely necessary! 

TYP Setting or display of function type con = controlling operation VVS or KVS; 

“3P” = 3-point motor operation + sensor function 

(no internal controlling function) 

U [V] Display of actual volume flow 0 to 12.8 V in 0.05 V increments 

Adjustment, Display and Connecting Elements 

9 

2 

1 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

Information Regarding Operation and Use 

When an AST10 is connected to a type A or B GLB, the 

parameters can be displayed and changed during operation. 

With type A GLB, the connecting cable with an 

unused wire end is used, and with type B, the wire with 

the plug-in connection is used. 

When the AST10 is connected to a type B GLB via the 

connecting cable with an unused wire, care must be 

taken to ensure that the communication signal is transmitted 

over the same wire as the 0 to 10 VDC command 

signal. Therefore, when the AST10 is connected, the 

command signal must be disconnected! If a command 

signal is to be transmitted nonetheless, this can be done 

by setting the required volume flow via the “Y” key. 

6a 

7a 

3 

Operation 

• Connect AST10 to GLB using compatible connecting 

cable (9); wait until message appears on the display. 

• Changing V . 

min: 

Press key 6a “V . 

min”, the required V . 

min temperature will 

be displayed as a percentage of V . 

nom (V . 

n). 

Change the displayed percentage value with the plus 

or minus key 2. Then press “Set” key 4. The new value 

will be sent to the controller. 

• Changing V . 

max: 

The required V . 

max temperature is displayed as a 

percentage of Vnom. To change V . 

max, press the “V . 

max” 

key 7 and follow the procedure for V . 

min. 

• To control V . 

max, a 10 VDC command signal (Y) must 

be transmitted to GLB. This is done with the “Y” key 

7a on the AST10. Enter the desired command signal 

and then confirm with the “Set” key. 

• After entering each parameter (value blinks), send the 

value to the controller via the “Set” key 4. 

• To restore the Trox factory settings, press the “Factory 

settings” key 5. 

Display of the Actual Value of the Output Signal 

U or UC 

To display the actual value of the output signal in volts, 

press key 3 “” This applies to all operating modes. 

Display of V . nom (V . n) 

To display the factory reference values (variables for 

V . 

nom), press key 6a (V . 

n). 

IMPORTANT 

Changes made in the operating mode of the controller 

(from “con” to “3Poder” or vice versa) only 

take effect after the device has been reset (briefly 

cut off the supply voltage to the controller).

AST10 Connection to GLB..., Series A 

in the control cabinet 


with unused wire ends 

Strain Relief Clamp on the Connecting Cable 

AST10 

GLB..., Series A 

AST10 Connection to GLB..., Series B 

in the control cabinet 



with unused wire ends 

GLB181.1E/3 

Strain relief clamp 

4 


Connection to GLB... 

The AST10 is connected to GLB… as illustrated in the 

circuit diagrams on this page. 

With GLB Series A, the included connecting cable with 

an unused wire end is used; then connect YC on the 

AST10 with UC on GLB… Series A. 

For the connection with GLB… Series B, use the 

connecting cable with the ready-made plug. 

The connecting cable with an unused wire end can also 

be used for Series B if the ceiling panels are closed but 

changes still need to be undertaken. In this case, it’s 

advisable to establish a connection from the junction box 

(YC must be available for this). 

However, for the duration of the communication, the 

line to clamp YC must be disconnected! 

AST10 Connection to GLB..., Series B 

directly to the unit 

GLB..., Series B GLB..., Series B 


with two-sided 

plug-in connection 

Mounting Advisory 

When using the connecting cable with a plug-in connection 

(with GLB… Type B) the strain relief clamp attached 

to the connecting cable is to be used as illustrated here.

Siemens Volume Flow Controller 

VAV Modular ASV181.1E/3 

1 

Contents 

Subject Page 

Application 2 

Functions 3 

Characteristic curves 3 

Functions 3 

Pressure-independent control characteristics 4 

Volume flow control and adjustment 4 

Adjuster AST10 4 




Order codes 7 

Terminal connections 8 

Continuous controlling, override control 9 

Examples of application 10 


Design changes reserved · All rights reserved · ® Gebrüder Trox GmbH (12/2001) · Leaflet No. E016EM5

Compact Controller ASV181.1E/3 

� 

� 

� � 

� Socket for AST10 connecting cable 

� Transducer tubing connector 

� Connecting cable to operator terminal or to DDC 

� Connecting cable for actuator 

� Mounting lug 

Operating Modes 

The ASV181.1E/3 has two operating modes, “CON” and 

“3P” (see circuit diagram below). 



2 

Application 

Operating Mode “CON” Operating Mode “3P” 

Room temperature controller 

� 

required volume flow, 0 to 10 VDC 

The Siemens electronic volume flow controller 

ASV181.1E/3 is a control unit for VAV terminal units. The 

membrane pressure transducer and control electronics 

are integrated into one housing. A separate actuator is 

connected for damper adjustment. These controllers are 

mainly used in VAV terminal units with specialized functions 

such as spring return, torque > 10 Nm or adjustable 

switch functions on the actuator. 

For variable volume flow control, a suitable room temperature 

controller (or air quality controller), a DDC outstation 

or a similar device must be used. A 0 to 10 VDC 

signal or three-point signal (TEC controller, DESIGO 

RXC31.1 etc.) can be used as the voltage range. To do 

this, the volume flow controller ASV181.1E/3 is deactivated. 

Switches or relays with a maximum of 2 set points 

are used for constant volume flow control. 

The ASV181.1E/3 is not outfitted with adjustment knobs 

V · min and V · max. All controller parameters factory-set by 

Trox. The customer does not need to make any adjustments. 

As soon as the supply voltage and room temperature 

controller have been connected, the terminal unit is 

ready for use. 

Any volume flow changes to the AST10 that may be 

necessary can easily be carried out by the customer. For 

parallel operation, several controllers can be connected 

up to one room temperature controller. Supply or extract 

air slave control can be realized. 

Static Measuring 

The actual value of the volume flow is monitored as a 

standard, linear electrical signal and can be switched to a 

DDC or used for the display. The voltage range for the 

actual and command value is standardized at 0 to 10 VDC. 

Volume flow is measured with a membrane pressure 

transducer. In automatic, recovered zero point calibration 

via an integrated air valve, minimum flow briefly occurs in 

the measuring line. This flow level is so low that as a rule 

the measuring element is not soiled. However, if the unit 

is used in unclean air, a VAV a plastic or coated terminal 

unit should be used. 

IMPORTANT 

Make certain that in critical situations the VAV terminal 

unit and membrane pressure transducer are tested 

for the resistance of their materials to hazardous 

materials and particle concentrations in ambient air. 

actual volume flow 

0 to 10 VDC 

ASV181.1E/3 Actuator ASV181.1E/3 

Operator terminal with 

communication capability, DDC 

3-point signal 24 VAC 

Actuator



Characteristic Curve of the Actual Value Signal 

Volume flow 

V · min unit 

· · 

Vactual = V 

U 

nom 

10 

Characteristic Curve of the Command Variable 

Volume flow 

V · nom 

V · nom 

V · max 

V · min 

V · min unit 

0 Actual value signal UC 10 VDC 

Vreq = Y · 

10 

(V 

· · 

max -Vmin) + V· min 

0 Actual command signal Y 10 VDC 

3 

Functions 

The volume flow is measured with a membrane pressure 

transducer. The effective pressure ∆pw of the differential 

pressure sensor in the VAV terminal unit is measured in 

the membrane pressure transducer of the ASV181.1E/3 

and linearized. The volume flow is calculated by a microprocessor 

in the controller. 

The actual volume flow is available as a linear voltage 

signal U. The measurement range (reference value) is set 

during factory calibration to suit the unit size in such a 

way that 10 VDC always corresponds to the unit nominal 

volume flow rate (V · nom). 


controller or by switches. The controller determines the 

required volume flow in accordance with the characteristic 

curve shown in the illustration and compares this 

with the actual value. The external damper actuator is 

controlled according to the volume flow tolerances. The 

factory-set volume flow ranges V · min and V · max can be 

altered by the customer using a Siemens AST10 adjuster, 

which can also be used to change the operating mode. 

IMPORTANT 

The operating mode must be set for each system 

because otherwise the desired function will not be 

available! 


Variable volume flow 

Using the command variables shown in the illustration 

as a basis, the ASV181.1E/3 calculates the volume flow, 

which can range from V · min to V · max. Override controls 

CLOSED or OPEN can be realized. 

Constant volume flow 

To realize override control as well as constant volume 

flows V · min and V · max, wire the input terminals for the command 

signal via relays or contacts. 

Command signal range limiting 

In the DDC outstation, the command variable must be 

limited for settings between V · min = 0 % and V · max = 

100 %. In this situation, the full published volume range 

can be used for future adjustment via the BMS. If the 

design volume flow rates are set in the unit, a full voltage 

signal range of 0-10 or 2-10 VDC can be used. However, 

these settings can only be changed by using the AST10, 

which involves gaining access to the terminal unit. 

(Operating Mode “3P”) 

In this operating mode, the internal controller electronics 

are inactivated. Only the reference value is factory set. 

Any calibrated V · min and V · max values have no impact on 

function.

Duct Pressure-Independent Control Characteristics 


1000 

Pa 

800 

600 

400 

200 



Adjuster AST10 

Volume flow 

in % of V · 20 40 60 80 100 

nom 

Vmax setting = V · 

. 

max . 

· 

Vnom Vmin setting = V · 

. 

min 

· 

V nom 

9 1 

2 

1 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

2 

3 

4 

5 

100 % 

. 100 % 

Liquid crystal display 

Plus/minus keys 

for changing parameters 

Cursor key 

(to toggle 

“Type” and “U”) 

Save key 

(to send data to the 

controller) 

Reset key 

for factory settings 

Rocker switch V · n 1) / V · min 

Rocker switch V · 6 

7 

max / Y 

8 Not allocated (reserved 

for future application) 

9 

Socket for connecting cable 

(make certain that plug is 

inserted correctly) 



4 



pressure, which means that pressure fluctuations result 

in only transient changes in volume flow. 

To prevent destabilization of volume flow control, a dead 

zone is provided within which the damper does not 

move. This dead zone, in conjunction with measuring 

tolerances, produces the volume flow deviation illustrated 

here. 

If the conditions mentioned in the product documentation 

are not met (e.g., lowest differential pressure, supply 

air conditions), larger deviations are likely to occur. 


The V · max value is the equivalent of the volume flow that is 

set with a 10 VDC command signal or V · max override control. 

The setting range for adjustments with the AST10 

adjuster is from 20 to 120 %. The percentage figures are 

based on V · nom. 


The V · min value is the equivalent of the volume flow that 

is set with a 0 VDC command signal or V · min override 

control. V · min may be set between –20 and 100 % of V · nom 

using the AST10. 

If V · min is set between –20 and 0 %, a command signal of 

0 VDC will close the damper, creating a leakproof seal. In 

case of value deviation, shut-off can be realized with 

input Y2 (see p. 9). 


The volume flow ranges can be adjusted on site using 

adjuster AST10. To do this, connect the AST10 to the 

controller (see AST10 product information). The calibrated 

V · min or V · max values can be set using the keys by 

the same names. The controller adopts these settings 

when the “Set” key is pressed. 

In 3P operating mode, the volume flow ranges can be 

changed only on operator terminals with communication 

capabilities (e.g., TEC). 

1) V · n equals V · nom




V 

100 10 20 95 36 72 342 

125 15 30 150 54 108 540 

160 25 50 250 90 180 900 

200 40 80 405 144 288 1458 

250 60 125 615 216 450 2214 

315 105 205 1025 378 738 3690 

400 170 335 1680 612 1206 6048 

· min 

unit 

V · to V 

min 

unit 

· nom 

to V · l/s 

from 

m 

from nom 

3 V 

/h 

2) 

· max 

V · max 

Size 


B x H 

mm 

V · min 

l/s m3 /h 

V · V min 

· max 

V · min unit 1) V · min unit 1) 


· nom 

200 x 100 45 45 215 162 162 774 

300 x 100 65 65 320 234 234 1152 

400 x 100 85 85 425 306 306 1530 

500 x 100 105 110 535 378 396 1926 

600 x 100 130 130 650 468 468 2340 

200 x 200 85 85 415 306 306 1494 

300 x 200 125 125 620 450 450 2232 

400 x 200 165 165 825 594 594 2970 

500 x 200 205 205 1035 738 738 3726 

600 x 200 250 250 1250 900 900 4500 

700 x 200 290 290 1450 1044 1044 5220 

800 x 200 330 330 1650 1188 1188 5940 

300 x 300 185 185 920 666 666 3312 

400 x 300 245 245 1230 882 882 4428 

500 x 300 305 305 1535 1098 1098 5526 

600 x 300 370 370 1850 1332 1332 6660 

700 x 300 430 430 2150 1548 1548 7740 

800 x 300 490 490 2450 1764 1764 8820 

900 x 300 555 555 2770 1998 1998 9972 

1000 x 300 620 620 3100 2232 2232 11160 

400 x 400 325 325 1630 1170 1170 5868 

500 x 400 410 410 2040 1476 1476 7344 

600 x 400 490 490 2450 1764 1764 8820 

700 x 400 570 570 2850 2052 2052 10260 

800 x 400 650 650 3250 2340 2340 11700 

900 x 400 735 735 3670 2646 2646 13212 

1000 x 400 820 820 4100 2952 2952 14760 

500 x 500 510 510 2540 1836 1836 9144 

600 x 500 610 610 3050 2196 2196 10980 

700 x 500 710 710 3550 2556 2556 12780 

800 x 500 810 810 4050 2916 2916 14580 

900 x 500 915 915 4570 3294 3294 16452 

1000 x 500 1020 1020 5100 3672 3672 18360 

600 x 600 730 730 3650 2628 2628 13140 

700 x 600 850 850 4250 3060 3060 15300 

800 x 600 970 970 4850 3492 3492 17460 

900 x 600 1100 1100 5500 3960 3960 19800 

1000 x 600 1220 1220 6100 4392 4392 21960 

700 x 700 990 990 4950 3564 3564 17820 

800 x 700 1140 1140 5700 4104 4104 20520 

900 x 700 1280 1280 6400 4608 4608 23040 

1000 x 700 1420 1420 7100 5112 5112 25560 

800 x 800 1300 1300 6500 4680 4680 23400 

900 x 800 1460 1460 7300 5256 5256 26280 

1000 x 800 1620 1620 8100 5832 5832 29160 

900 x 900 1640 1640 8200 5904 5904 29520 

1000 x 900 1820 1820 9100 6552 6552 32760 

1000 x 1000 2020 2020 10100 7272 7272 36360 

1) V · min = 0 can also be realized 2) TVR only 

5 

V · max 

to V · nom


Volume flow 

as % of V 

100 5 5 

80 5 5 

60 7 7 

40 7 8 

20 9 14 

10 20 >14 

20 >14 

· nom 

∆V · in ± % 




3) Indicate configurations for master and slave devices when ordering 



6 

Single Duct Unit 



TVZ / 160 / 00 / LP3 / E - 50 - 240 l/s 

TVZ / 160 / 00 / LP3 / M - 50 - 240 l/s 

TVZ / 160 / 00 / LP3 / S - 240 l/s 

TVZ / 160 / 00 / LP3 / F - 100 l/s 



E 

M 

S 

U 

F 2) 

X 

2) 3) 





V · min 

E Individual 

M Master 

S Slave 


X 3-point 


V · max at volume flow ratio to master 

controller 

V · min at required volume flow 1 

(smaller value) 

V · max at required volume flow 2 

(larger value) 


V · max at 100 % 

V · nom set 

V · max 

3) 

3)




Size 

Volume Flow Control Tolerances for TVM 1) 

Volume flow 


V · min unit 


l/s m 3 /h 

V · nom 

TVM cold 

V · min unit 

∆V · in ± % 

100 5 7 

80 5 10 

60 5 12 

40 7 15 

20 9 - 

10 20 - 

20 - 

V · nom 

125 45 150 162 540 

160 75 250 270 900 

200 120 405 432 1458 

250 185 615 666 2214 

TVM total 

7 




TVM / 160 / LP5 / M - 50 - 240 l/s 

TVM / 160 / LP5 / F - 400 l/s 


Operating 

mode 

E 

M 

X 

F 

‡ min at –5 % 


volume flow (‡ cold) 

‡ nom set 

‡ min at –5 % 



flow 


E Individual 

M Master 


X 3-point 



‡ min at required 

volume flow ‡ warm 

‡ max at 100 % 

‡ nom set 

. 

Vwarm ‡ min at required 


flow 

‡ max at 100 % 

. 

Vcold . . 

Vwarm = Vcold



ASV181.1E/3 

Service Signal ASV181.1E/3 

24 V 

G G0 

ASV181.1E/3 

˜ y 

Room 

temperature 

controller 

YC 



enclosure 



8 

Nomenclature 

Key to Wire colors Bedeutung 

wires Code 

G red Phase AC 24 V 

G0 black Ground AC 24 V 

Y1 purple Position signal “open” (3P) 

or override control (CON) 

Y2 orange Position signal “open” (3P) 

or override control (CON) 

YC gray Volume flow position signal 

0-10 VDC and 

communication signal 

U pink Actual value of output signal 

0-10 VDC 

Wiring 

Wiring for the 24 VAC voltage supply must be performed 


(EN 60742). 

If several controllers are connected to one 24 VAC grid, 

it is important to ensure that a common neutral or ground 

wire is used. 

Service Connection 


AST10 adjuster be linked up in an easily accessible 

location. This avoids having to remove ceiling panels 

when service is performed. Suitable locations include: 

spare terminals in room temperature controllers, or wall 

mounted enclosures. 

It is important to ensure that G and G0 are available. 

Therefore, a 4-wire connection is required to the commissioning 

point connection.



Continuous Controlling between V · min and V · max 


24 V 


Command 

signal 

0 to 10 VDC 


ASV181.1E/3 

G 

G0 

G G0 

S1 S2 

Y1 Y2 U 


Actual value 

of output signal 

0 to 10 VDC 

Controlling with an External Digital Operator Terminal 

Room Temperature Volume Flow Cascade 


24 V 

ASV181.1E/3 

24 V 

ASV181.1E/3 

Digital operator terminal 

9 

Variable Volume Flow Controlling 

The ASV181.1E/3 is connected to the 24 VAC grid. If the 

DDC outstation/controller is in the same grid, the command 

signal can be applied via a single wire. If the grids 

are separate, the command signal is connected by two 

wires. The actual value signal for the volume flow can be 

used. 

Several ASV181.1E/3 units can be connected in parallel. 


operated in parallel by one room temperature controller. 

If the terminal units are the same size and V · min and V · max 

parameters are set at the same values, all the units control 

the same volume flow. If the settings differ, the units 

control an equal proportion of flow. This allows ratio control 

to be achieved between the supply and extract air 

controllers. 

The variable volume flow control can be overridden for 

shut-off and startup using zero-potential switches 

(supplied by customer). 

Continuous 

Controlling 

open open 


Fully open 

Controlling V 

closed open 

. min 

Controlling V 

open open 

. Function S1 

Switch 

S2 

(window 

switch) 

max closed closed 



Type 

of controlling 

VVS, 

supply 

or extract air 

KVS, 

supply 

or extract air

Slave Control 

G G0 

Y1 Y2 YC U 

DDC outstation/controller 

ASV181.1E/3 

G G0 Y1 Y2 

G 

24 V 

Room 

temperature 

controller 

G G0 Y 

YC U 

Slave controller ASV181.1E/3 


24 V 


controller 


G 

G0 

G0 

Y1 Y2 YC U 

Cold duct controller ASV181.1E/3 

Warm duct controller ASV181.1E/3 

Y 

possibly to 




10 

Supply or Extract Air Slave Control (Master/Slave) 

In the case of parallel control of the units, an unfavorable 

difference between supply and extract air can occur if 

the pressure in one duct is too low. Therefore, the actual 

volume flow value (usually the value of the supply air) 

should be used as the command variable for the volume 

flow controller of the slave. If the extract air flow is not to 

be controlled by the DDC controller, a slave control is 

also used. 

Ratio control can be achieved using the ASV181.1E/3 

i.e. the ratio of extract air to supply air must be the same 

under all operating conditions. 


follows: 

V · max setting = 

V · max M 

V · min M 

V · max S 

V · min S 


100 %. The maximum setting is 120 %. 

= 

V · max S 

V · max M 

Volume Flow Controller of TVM Units 

The two controllers fitted to the dual duct unit TVM (cold 

duct, warm duct) are to be wired by the customer as 

illustrated in the circuit diagram on this page (including 

the 24 VAC cross-connection). 



In most instances, the proportion of warm air is increased 

from 0 to the required V · warm as a maximum set point. 

The warm duct controller (V · total is measured) is therefore 

set as a constant value controller and does not require a 


For more information, refer to the TVM product documentation. 

· 

V · nom M 

V · nom S 

· 100 %



Commissioning 

Fault Diagnosis 

Check wiring 

Activate power supply 

Switch on air conditioning system 

Record actual value signal U for override control V · min 

Record the actual value signal U 

Record actual value signal U for override control V · max 

Record the actual value signal U 

Supply voltage in conformance 

with Siemens specifications? 

yes 


etc. 

Signal U consistent? Controller faulty 

yes 

Actuator opens 

and closes? 

yes 

Volume flow V · min? 

yes 


yes 

Volume flow 

command signal? 

yes 


Damper 

obstructed? 

Duct pressure 

sufficient? 

Measurement 

tubing to the 

transducer 

damaged? 


controller 

Check window 

switch, relays etc. 

Ordering Example for a Replacement Controller 

no 

no 

no 

no 

no 

no 

no 

Siemens ASV181.1E/3, 

vorjustiert für TVR / 125 / E0 - 45 - 100 l/s 

11 

Commissioning 

A function test for commissioning can be carried out 

using adjuster AST10 or the DDC outstation/controller. 

A defined volume flow is set for both of these units. 

The actual volume flow is calculated on the basis of the 

monitored actual value signal and is compared with the 

set value. 

In many instances the faults can result from incorrect 

wiring. Therefore, when checking an individual volume 

flow controller, first disconnect all lines except for 

G and G0. 

The power supply is then switched off and a zero point 

comparison is performed automatically. The actual output 

signal is then set to zero for about 2 minutes. 


opened manually, the voltage will increase. Then briefly 

disconnect the supply voltage so that the actuator can 

be resynchronized. 

Volume flow control is checked by setting a command 

signal to which the monitored value must correspond 

after a short time. Set points are defined by a linear voltage 

signal, a switch or by adjuster AST10. 

Apply the override control and test the desired functions. 

The function test can be simplified using the AST10 adjuster. 

The set volume values V · min and V · max can be read. 

The AST10 can also simulate a command signal. Operating 

mode and direction of flow in the actuator are 

displayed. The Trox factory settings can be restored with 

the “Factory settings” key. 

Replacement Controllers 


to the terminal unit type and size must be used. Noncalibrated 

controllers may only be used as a stopgap 

solution. 


controller: 

• Unit type and size; for TVM units: whether the unit is a 

cold or warm duct controller 


• V · min and V · max

Siemens Actuator 

1 

Contents 

Subject Page 

GLB131.1E 2 

GBB131.1E 2 

GEB131.1E 3 

GIB131.1E 3 

GMA131.1E 4 

GCA131.1E 4 

Design changes reserved · All rights reserved · ® Gebrüder Trox GmbH (12/2001) · Leaflet No. E016EM6

GLB131.1E 

� 

� 



� Duct position display 

GBB131.1E 

� 



� 



� 

� 

� 

� 

� 



2 

Actuator GLB131.1E 


Application 

Maintenance free damper actuator; with 10 Nm torque; 

for three-point control of VAV terminal units outfitted 

with Siemens-Landis & Staefa volume flow controllers 

ASV181.1E/3. 

For technical data, see the applicable Siemens product 


Function 

The actuator is factory mounted, fixed to the damper 

shaft, and factory-wired to the volume flow controller. 

The integral rotation angle limiter is set, and the actuator 

is overload protected. When the end stops are reached, 

the actuator stops automatically. No limit switches are 

required. 

For manual adjustment, the gears can be disengaged via 

a button. 

Actuator GBB131.1E 

Application 

Maintenance free damper actuator with 20 Nm torque; 

for three-point control of VAV terminal units outfitted with 

Siemens-Landis & Staefa volume flow controllers 

ASV181.1E/3. 



Function 

The actuator is factory mounted, fixed to the damper 

shaft, and factory-wired to the volume flow controller. 

The integral rotation angle limiter is set, and the actuator 


the actuator stops automatically. No limit switches are 

required. 


a button.


GEB131.1E 

GIB131.1E 

� � 



� 



� 

� 



� 

� 

� 



3 

Actuator GEB131.1E 

Application 




ASV181.1E/3. 



Function 

The actuator is factory-mounted on the damper shaft 

and factory-wired to the volume flow controller. The 

integrated rotation angle limiter is calibrated, and the 


reached, the motor automatically comes to a standstill. 

No limit switches are needed. 


a button. 

Actuator GIB131.1E 

Application 




ASV181.1E/3. 



Function 

The actuator is factory mounted on the damper shaft 

and factory-wired to the volume flow controller. The 

integrated rotation angle limiter is calibrated, and the 


reached, the motor automatically comes to a standstill. 

No limit switches are needed. 


a button.

GMA131.1E 

� 


� Hand adjustment 

� Gear arrestor 

GCA131.1E 

� 


� Hand adjustment 

� Gear arrestor 

� 

� 

� 

� 



� 

� 

� 

� 



4 

Actuator GMA131.1E 


Application 

Maintenance free actuator with 7 Nm torque and spring 

return; for three-point control of VAV terminal units outfitted 

with Siemens-Landis & Staefa volume flow controllers 

ASV181.1E/3. 

The actuator is used in the event of a power failure when, 

for safety reasons, either an open or a closed damper 

position is required. 



Function 


factory-wired to the volume flow controller. The integrated 

rotation angle limiter is calibrated, and the actuator 


the motor automatically comes to a standstill. No limit 

switches are needed. 

A hexagonal wrench can be used to perform manual 

adjustments on the actuator, which can be secured with 

a screwdriver. 

Actuator GCA131.1E 

Application 

Maintenance free damper actuator with 16 Nm torque 

and spring return; for volume flow controllers outfitted 

with Siemens-Landis & Staefa actuators ASV181.1E/3. 

The actuator is used in the event of a power failure when, 

for safety reasons, either an open or a closed damper 

position is required. 



Function 


factory-wired to the volume flow controller. The integrated 

rotation angle limiter is calibrated and the actuator 


the motor automatically comes to a standstill. No limit 

switches are needed. 


a hexagonal wrench.

Honeywell 

Compact Volume Flow Controller W7751H2009 

1 

Contents 

Subject Page 

Application 2 

Functions 3 

On-site changes in volume flow 3 

Volume flow ranges for single duct units 4 



Order codes 6 




Compact Controller W7751H2009 

1 

2 

5 

6 

1 Shaft clamp 


3 Position display 



6 Service pin 1) 

1) Hole in circuit board; operate switch 

with non-metallic pin only. 

Honeywell 


3 

4 

2 

Application 

The Honeywell electronic volume flow controller 

W7751H2009 is a complete control unit for volume flow 

control in VAV systems. The dynamic differential pressure 

transducers, actuators and electronic controls are integrated 

into one housing. A LON bus interface makes the 

unit suitable for systems using LON bus technology. For 

technical data regarding LON interfaces, consult the 

applicable Honeywell product documentation. 

The W7751H2009 is not outfitted with adjustment knobs 

for V . 

min and V . 

max settings. The controllers are factorycalibrated 

by Trox to the required volume flow using an 

OEM tool. All remaining function parameters are set on 

site by Honeywell technicians. 

An operator terminal (T7560/T7460; on customer’s premises; 

see Honeywell product documentation) is used to 

control room temperature and volume flow. 

Standard filtration in air conditioning systems allows use 

of the W7751H2009 without dust protection filters. 

Commissioning 

The controllers are integrated into the LON network via 

the system integrator (binding). These services are to be 

provided by the system builder or the controller vendor, 

and are to be integrated into the planning and bid submission 

phases. 

Any additional changes in volume flow can be carried 

out on site via the LON bus. Supply or extract air slave 

control can also be realized (contact Honeywell).

Honeywell 


Functions 

The volume flow is measured according to the dynamic 

differential pressure principle. The effective pressure of 

the differential pressure sensor in the terminal unit allows 

the detection of a partial volume flow passing through 

the transducer. This partial volume flow, which is proportional 

to the total volume flow, is measured and temperature-compensated 

using two temperature-dependent 

resistors. The volume flow is calculated by a microprocessor 

in the controller. The characteristic curve of the 

effective pressure is reflected in the controller so that the 

linearization can be carried out by the computer. As a 

result, the linearized volume flow is presented as a value 

in physical units. 

The required volume flow is calculated by the room temperature 

control circuit between the limit values V . 

min and 

V . 

max. Special operating conditions (presence detectors 

and window switches) can be taken into account. 

The computed volume flow is compared with the actual 

volume flow. The damper actuator is controlled in accordance 

with the volume flow tolerances. The parameters 

relevant to volume flow control are factory-programmed. 

After the customer has set the address, the 

controllers are ready for use. 

3 


The unit nominal flow rate V . 

nom is stored as a parameter. 

This value must not be exceeded or changed. The range 

for minimum and maximum design volume flow can be 

changed, but the limits given in the tables must be 

observed. For constant volume flow control, both parameters 

can be set to the same value. 



suitable programming aids (software, central control 

unit). The controllers must be wired to the LON network 

and the supply voltage must be present. For detailed 

information regarding changing of parameters, consult 

the relevant Honeywell product documentation. 

Adjustment Guidelines 

• V . 

min values that fall below the minimum values given 

in the table should not be entered, as this could destabilize 

volume flow control. 

• V . 

min- and V . 

max values must not be confused when they 

are entered. 

• No other parameters for volume flow control such as 

actuator running times, unit nominal flows etc. may be 

changed.

Volume Flow Ranges TVZ, TVA, TVR, TVS, TVRK 

Nominal 

size 

V · min 

V 

unit 

· to 

from to min 

V from to 

unit 

· l/s m 

nom 

3 /h 

V 

1) 1) 

· V max 

· min 

V · min 


B x H 

mm 

V · min unit 1) 

V · max 

to 

V · nom 

l/s m 3 /h 

from to 

200 x 100 45 170 65 215 162 612 234 774 

300 x 100 65 255 95 320 234 918 342 1152 

400 x 100 85 340 130 425 306 1224 468 1530 

500 x 100 105 430 160 535 378 1548 576 1926 

600 x 100 130 520 195 650 468 1872 702 2340 

200 x 200 85 330 125 415 306 1188 450 1494 

300 x 200 125 495 185 620 450 1782 666 2232 

400 x 200 165 660 250 825 594 2376 900 2970 

500 x 200 205 830 310 1035 738 2988 1116 3726 

600 x 200 250 1000 375 1250 900 3600 1350 4500 

700 x 200 290 1160 435 1450 1044 4176 1566 5220 

800 x 200 330 1320 495 1650 1188 4752 1782 5940 

300 x 300 185 735 275 920 666 2646 990 3312 

400 x 300 245 985 370 1230 882 3546 1332 4428 

500 x 300 305 1230 460 1535 1098 4428 1656 5526 

600 x 300 370 1480 555 1850 1332 5328 1998 6660 

700 x 300 430 1720 645 2150 1548 6192 2322 7740 

800 x 300 490 1960 735 2450 1764 7056 2646 8820 

900 x 300 555 2215 830 2770 1998 7974 2988 9972 

1000 x 300 620 2480 930 3100 2232 8928 3348 11160 

400 x 400 325 1305 490 1630 1170 4698 1764 5868 

500 x 400 410 1630 610 2040 1476 5868 2196 7344 

600 x 400 490 1960 735 2450 1764 7056 2646 8820 

700 x 400 570 2280 855 2850 2052 8208 3078 10260 

800 x 400 650 2600 975 3250 2340 9360 3510 11700 

900 x 400 735 2935 1100 3670 2646 10566 3960 13212 

1000 x 400 820 3280 1230 4100 2952 11808 4428 14760 

500 x 500 510 2030 760 2540 1836 7308 2736 9144 

600 x 500 610 2440 915 3050 2196 8784 3294 10980 

700 x 500 710 2840 1065 3550 2556 10224 3834 12780 

800 x 500 810 3240 1215 4050 2916 11664 4374 14580 

900 x 500 915 3655 1370 4570 3294 13158 4932 16452 

1000 x 500 1020 4080 1530 5100 3672 14688 5508 18360 

600 x 600 730 2920 1095 3650 2628 10512 3942 13140 

700 x 600 850 3400 1275 4250 3060 12240 4590 15300 

800 x 600 970 3880 1455 4850 3492 13968 5238 17460 

900 x 600 1100 4400 1650 5500 3960 15840 5940 19800 

1000 x 600 1220 4880 1830 6100 4392 17568 6588 21960 

700 x 700 990 3960 1485 4950 3564 14256 5346 17820 

800 x 700 1140 4560 1710 5700 4104 16416 6156 20520 

900 x 700 1280 5120 1920 6400 4608 18432 6912 23040 

1000 x 700 1420 5680 2130 7100 5112 20448 7668 25560 

800 x 800 1300 5200 1950 6500 4680 18720 7020 23400 

900 x 800 1460 5840 2190 7300 5256 21024 7884 26280 

1000 x 800 1620 6480 2430 8100 5832 23328 8748 29160 

900 x 900 1640 6560 2460 8200 5904 23616 8856 29520 

1000 x 900 1820 7280 2730 9100 6552 26208 9828 32760 

1000 x 1000 2020 8080 3030 10100 7272 29088 10908 36360 

1) V · min = 0 can also be realized 2) TVR only 

Honeywell 


1002) 10 75 30 95 36 270 108 342 

125 15 120 45 150 54 432 162 540 

160 25 200 75 250 90 720 270 900 

200 40 325 120 405 144 1170 432 1458 

250 60 490 185 615 216 1764 666 2214 

315 105 820 310 1025 378 2952 1116 3690 

400 170 1345 505 1680 612 4842 1818 6048 


4 

to V · nom 


from to to V · nom

Honeywell 



Volume flow 


100 5 5 

80 5 5 

60 7 7 

40 7 8 

20 9 14 

10 20 >14 

20 >14 


∆V · in ± % 



5 


Order Codes / Examples 


TVZ-R / 160 / 00 / HM0 / E - 50 - 240 l/s 

TVZ-R / 160 / 00 / HM0 / M - 50 - 240 l/s 

TVZ-R / 160 / 00 / HM0 / S - 50 - 240 l/s 

TVZ-R / 160 / 00 / HM0 / F - 100 l/s 



E 

M 

S 

F 2) 


E Individual 

M Master 

S Slave 

F Constant 




V · min 

V · max 


V · max at V · max, equivalent of volume 

flow ratio to master controller 


V · max at 100 %


Nominal 

size V · min unit V · V min unit 

· l/s m 

nom 

3 /h 


Volume flow 

as % of V · Nenn 


Honeywell 


TVM cold 

∆V · in ± % 

100 5 7 

80 5 10 

60 5 12 

40 7 15 

20 9 - 

10 20 - 

20 - 

V · nom 

125 45 150 162 540 

160 75 250 270 900 

200 120 405 432 1458 

250 185 615 666 2214 

TVM total 

6 


Order Codes / Examples 


TVM-R / 160 / HQ0 / M - 50 - 240 l/s 

TVM-R / 160 / HQ0 / F - 400 l/s 


Operating 

mode 

E 

E 

M 

F 

‡ min at 0 % 




E Individual 

M Master 



. 

Vwarm Cold duct controller Warm duct controller 

‡ min adjustment at 

required volume flow 

‡ warm 

‡ max at 100 % 

. 

Vcold . . 

Vwarm = Vcold

Honeywell 



1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 

W7751H2009 

LED Status Information 

LED status Controller status 

Off No supply voltage 

On 

Not in working order 

or not configured 

Slow 

Blinking 

Running, normal communication 

Fast Alarm ready 

Blinking or in manual test mode 

7 

Nomenclature 

1, 2 Supply voltage (24 V) 


Connection for Wall Module T7560/T7460 

4 Command signal input 

5 Ground, neutral, non-earthed 

6 Temperature signal input, sensor 

7 Bypass switch input 

8 LED 

Triac Output for Valve Actuator, 

Fan or Reheat Coils 

9 Position signal OPEN 

10 Position signal CLOSED 

11, 12 LON bus 

Wiring 

Wiring for the 24 VAC supply voltage must be performed 


(EN 60742). 



wire is used. 

The earth terminals (terminal 3) of each controller in the 

system must be connected to a high-value earth junction 

box. Lines should be as short as possible and wires 

should be at least 1-2 mm wide.

Honeywell 



Check wiring 

Switch on supply voltage 

Switch on control and air conditioning systems 

As a rule, commissioning of control systems 

is carried out by Honeywell technicians. 

For information regarding commissioning 

(LON networks, communication, binding, 

software etc.), consult the releavant Honeywell 

product documentation. 

8 

A function test cannot be carried out without the other 

components being connected and without functioning 

communication. 

In many cases, incorrect wiring can give rise to system 

malfunctions. Therefore, a careful check should be 

carried out to ensure that all connections are correct. 


opened manually, the voltage will increase. This can be 

confirmed with the aid of a connected laptop computer 

or in the central control unit. After manual adjustment, 

the actuator must be moved back to its original position. 

Volume flow control is checked by comparing preset 

values in the software with the actual values displayed. 

Ordering Example for a Replacement Controller Replacement Controllers 

Faulty controllers must be replaced by units that are calibrated 

to the type and size of terminal unit being used. 

Since every LON controller has its own LON ID number, 

binding must first be performed (network replace) in 

order to restore functionality. 


controller: 




• V . 

min and V . 

Honeywell compact volume flow controller 

W7751H2009, 


max 

• Commissioning no. and delivery date of the defective 

controller

Honeywell Volume Flow Controller W7751F2003 

1 

Contents 

Subject Page 

Application 2 

Functions 3 

On-site changes in volume flow 3 




Order code 6 




Volume Flow Controller W7751F2003 

1 

1 Terminal block 


3 LED function display 

4 Service pin 

5 Additional LON bus connection 


4 5 

2 

3 

2 

Application 

The Honeywell electronic volume flow controller 

W7751F2003 is a digital volume flow controller for VAV 

terminal units in VVS systems. A dynamic differential 

pressure transducer and controller electronics are integrated 

into one housing. A suitable actuator is integrated 

as well. 

The unit’s LON bus interface enables use in systems with 

LON bus technology. For technical data regarding the 

LON interface, consult the applicable Honeywell product 


The W7751F2003 is not outfitted with adjustment knobs 

for V . 

min and V . 

max settings. The controllers are factorycalibrated 

(by Trox) to the specified volume flow using 

an OEM tool. All remaining parameters for the required 

functions are set on site by Honeywell technicians. 

An operator terminal (T7560/T7460; customer’s premises; 

see Honeywell product documentation) is used to 

control room temperature and/ volume flow. 

Standard filtration in air conditioning systems allows use 

of the W7751F2003 without dust protection filters. 

Commissioning 

The controllers are integrated into the LON network via 

the system integrator (binding). These services are to be 

provided by the system builder or the controller vendor, 

and are to be integrated into the planning and bid submission 

phases. 

Any further changes in volume flow are to be carried out 

on site via the LON bus. Supply or extract air slave 

control and other control functions can also be realized 

(by arrangment with Honeywell). Controller functions can 

also be realized (contact Honeywell).


Functions 

The volume flow is measured according to the dynamic 

differential pressure principle. The effective pressure of 

the differential pressure sensor passing through the 

transducer allows the detection of a partial volume flow. 

This partial volume flow, which is proportional to the 

total volume flow, is measured and temperature-compensated 

by two temperature-dependent resistors. The 

volume flow is calculated by a microprocessor in the 

controller. The characteristic curve of the effective pressure 

is reflected in the controller so that the linearization 

can be carried out by the computer. As a result, the 

linearized volume flow is presented as a value in physical 

units. 

The required volume flow is calculated by the room temperature 

control circuit between the limit values V . 

min and 

V . 

max. Special operating conditions (presence detectors 

and window switches) can be taken into account. 

The computed required volume flow is compared with 

the actual value. The damper actuator is controlled in 

accordance with the volume flow tolerances. The parameters 

relevant to volume flow control are factory-programmed. 

After the customer has entered the remaining 

data, the controllers are ready for use. 

3 


The unit nominal flow rate (V . 

nom) is stored as a parameter. 

This value must not be exceeded or changed. The 

range for minimum and maximum design volume flow 

can be changed, but the limits given in the tables must 

be observed. For constant volume flow control, both 

parameters can be set to the same value. 



suitable programming aids (software, central control 

unit). The controllers must be wired to the LON network 

and the supply voltage must be present.For 

detailed information regarding changing of parameters, 

consult the relevant Honeywell product documentation. 

Adjustment Rules 

• V . 

min values that fall below the minimum values given in 

the table should not be entered, as this could destabilize 

volume flow control. 

• V . 

min and V . 

max values must not be confused when they 

are entered. 

• Other parameters for volume flow control such as 

actuator running times, unit nominal flows etc. must 

not be changed.



Nominal 

size 

V · min 

V 

unit 

· to 

to from min 

V to from 

unit 

· l/s m 

nom 

3 /h 

V 

1) 1) 

· V max 

· min 

V · min 



V · max 

to 

V · nom 

1002) 10 75 30 95 36 270 108 342 

125 15 120 45 150 54 432 162 540 

160 25 200 75 250 90 720 270 900 

200 40 325 120 405 144 1170 432 1458 

250 60 490 185 615 216 1764 666 2214 

315 105 820 310 1025 378 2952 1116 3690 

400 170 1345 505 1680 612 4842 1818 6048 

B x H 

mm 

l/s m 3 /h 

to from 

200 x 100 45 170 65 215 162 612 234 774 

300 x 100 65 255 95 320 234 918 342 1152 

400 x 100 85 340 130 425 306 1224 468 1530 

500 x 100 105 430 160 535 378 1548 576 1926 

600 x 100 130 520 195 650 468 1872 702 2340 

200 x 200 85 330 125 415 306 1188 450 1494 

300 x 200 125 495 185 620 450 1782 666 2232 

400 x 200 165 660 250 825 594 2376 900 2970 

500 x 200 205 830 310 1035 738 2988 1116 3726 

600 x 200 250 1000 375 1250 900 3600 1350 4500 

700 x 200 290 1160 435 1450 1044 4176 1566 5220 

800 x 200 330 1320 495 1650 1188 4752 1782 5940 

300 x 300 185 735 275 920 666 2646 990 3312 

400 x 300 245 985 370 1230 882 3546 1332 4428 

500 x 300 305 1230 460 1535 1098 4428 1656 5526 

600 x 300 370 1480 555 1850 1332 5328 1998 6660 

700 x 300 430 1720 645 2150 1548 6192 2322 7740 

800 x 300 490 1960 735 2450 1764 7056 2646 8820 

900 x 300 555 2215 830 2770 1998 7974 2988 9972 

1000 x 300 620 2480 930 3100 2232 8928 3348 11160 

400 x 400 325 1305 490 1630 1170 4698 1764 5868 

500 x 400 410 1630 610 2040 1476 5868 2196 7344 

600 x 400 490 1960 735 2450 1764 7056 2646 8820 

700 x 400 570 2280 855 2850 2052 8208 3078 10260 

800 x 400 650 2600 975 3250 2340 9360 3510 11700 

900 x 400 735 2935 1100 3670 2646 10566 3960 13212 

1000 x 400 820 3280 1230 4100 2952 11808 4428 14760 

500 x 500 510 2030 760 2540 1836 7308 2736 9144 

600 x 500 610 2440 915 3050 2196 8784 3294 10980 

700 x 500 710 2840 1065 3550 2556 10224 3834 12780 

800 x 500 810 3240 1215 4050 2916 11664 4374 14580 

900 x 500 915 3655 1370 4570 3294 13158 4932 16452 

1000 x 500 1020 4080 1530 5100 3672 14688 5508 18360 

600 x 600 730 2920 1095 3650 2628 10512 3942 13140 

700 x 600 850 3400 1275 4250 3060 12240 4590 15300 

800 x 600 970 3880 1455 4850 3492 13968 5238 17460 

900 x 600 1100 4400 1650 5500 3960 15840 5940 19800 

1000 x 600 1220 4880 1830 6100 4392 17568 6588 21960 

700 x 700 990 3960 1485 4950 3564 14256 5346 17820 

800 x 700 1140 4560 1710 5700 4104 16416 6156 20520 

900 x 700 1280 5120 1920 6400 4608 18432 6912 23040 

1000 x 700 1420 5680 2130 7100 5112 20448 7668 25560 

800 x 800 1300 5200 1950 6500 4680 18720 7020 23400 

900 x 800 1460 5840 2190 7300 5256 21024 7884 26280 

1000 x 800 1620 6480 2430 8100 5832 23328 8748 29160 

900 x 900 1640 6560 2460 8200 5904 23616 8856 29520 

1000 x 900 1820 7280 2730 9100 6552 26208 9828 32760 

1000 x 1000 2020 8080 3030 10100 7272 29088 10908 36360 

1) V · min = 0 can also be realized 2) Nur TVR only 


4 

to V · nom 


to from to V · nom



Volume flow 


100 5 5 

80 5 5 

60 7 7 

40 7 8 

20 9 14 

10 20 >14 

20 >14 


∆V · in ± % 



5 




TVZ-R / 160 / 00 / HN5 / 0 - 50 - 240 l/s 

TVZ-R / 160 / 00 / HN5 / M - 50 - 240 l/s 

TVZ-R / 160 / 00 / HN5 / S - 50 - 240 l/s 

TVZ-R / 160 / 00 / HN5 / F - 100 l/s 



E 

M 

S 

F 2) 



V · min 

E Individual 

M Master 

S Slave 


V · min adjustment at required V · min 

V · max adjustment at required V · max 

V · max 

V · min adjustment at 0 % 

V · max at V · max, equivalent of 

volume/flow ratio to master controller 


V · max at 100 %



Nominal 

size V · min unit V · V min unit 

· l/s m 

nom 

3 /h 

Volume Flow Control Tolerances for TVM 1) 

Volume flow 


TVM cold 

∆V · in ± % 

100 5 7 

80 5 10 

60 5 12 

40 7 15 

20 9 - 

10 20 - 

20 - 

V · nom 

125 45 150 162 540 

160 75 250 270 900 

200 120 405 432 1458 

250 185 615 666 2214 

TVM total 

1) Percentage figures based on ‡ actual Volume Flow Parameters 

6 




TVM-R / 160 / HR6 / M - 50 - 240 l/s 

TVM-R / 160 / HR6 / F - 400 l/s 

Operating 

mode 

E 

E 

M 

F 

‡ min at 0 % 




E Individual 

M Master 



. 

Vwarm Cold duct controller Warm duct controller 

‡ min adjustment at 

required volume flow 

‡ warm 

‡ max at 100 % 

. 

Vcold . . 

Vwarm = Vcold



32 

W7751F2003 

31 

30 

29 

LED Status Information 

28 

1 2 3 4 5 6 19 20 21 22 

LED status Controller status 

Off No supply voltage 

On 

Not in working order 

or not configured 

Slow 

Blinking 

Running, normal communication 

Fast Alarm available 

Blinking or in manual test mode 

27 

26 

.............. 

25 

24 

23 

7 

Nomenclature 

1, 2 Supply voltage (24 V) 


Connection for Wall Module T7770C 

23 to 27 

Triac Output for External Valve, 

Fan or Reheat Coils 

3 24 V 

5 Position signal OPEN 

6 Position signal CLOSED 

Lon-Bus 

19, 20 E-Bus connection 

Function of the other clamps and more technical details 

see Honeywell documentation. Clamp 13 to 16 and 

21 to 22 not in use. 

Wiring 

Wiring for the 24 VAC supply voltage must be performed 


(EN 60742). 



wire is used. 

The earth terminals (terminal 32) of each controller in the 

system must be connected to a high-value earth junction 

box. Lines should be as short as possible and wires 

should be at least 1-2 mm wide.



Check wiring 

Activate supply voltage 

Switch on control and air conditioning systems 

As a rule, commissioning of control systems is 

carried out by Honeywell technicians. 

For information on commissioning 

(LON networks, communication software etc.) 

consult the relevant Honeywell product 


8 

A function test must be carried out with the other components 

connected and with communication functioning. 

In many cases, incorrect wiring can give rise to system 

malfunctions. Therefore, a careful check should be carried 

out to ensure that all connections are correct. 


opened manually, the voltage will increase. This can be 

confirmed with the aid of a connected laptop computer 

or in the central control unit. After being adjusted manually, 

the actuator must be moved back to its original 

position. 

Volume flow control is checked by comparing preset 

values in the software with the actual values on the 

display. 

Ordering Example for a Replacement Controller Replacement Controllers 


to the terminal unit type and size must be used. Since 

every LON controller has its own LON ID number, binding 

must first be performed (network replace) in order to 

restore the function. 


controller: 

• Unit type and size; for TVM units, indicate whether the 

unit is a cold or warm duct controller 


• V . 

min and V . 

Honeywell volume flow controller W7751F2003, 


max 

• Commissioning no. and delivery date of defects

Honeywell Actuator ML6174E2008 

1 

Contents 

Subject Page 

ML6174E2008 2 


ML6174E2008 

1 Shaft clamp 



4 Connecting cable 

1 

2 

3 

4 

Honeywell Actuator ML6174E2008 

2 

Actuator ML6174E2008 

Application 


with Honeywell volume flow controllers. 

Functions 


shaft. The unit is factory-wired to the volume flow controller. 

The integral rotation angle limiter is set, and the 


reached, the actuator stops automatically. No limit switches 

are required. 


set). 

For manual adjustment, the gears can be disengaged 

via a button.

Sauter RLE 150 

1 

Contents 

Subject Page 





Volume Flow Ranges, Single-Duct Units 6 

Single-Duct Units 7 

Dual Duct Units TVM 8 


Room Temperature Control 10 

Override Control 10 

Supply/Extract Air Slave Control 11 

Volume Flow Control of TVM Units 12 


Design changes reserved · All rights reserved · ® Gebrüder Trox GmbH (12/2001) · Leaflet No. E016MB7

RLE 150 (Master) 

RLE 150 (Slave) 

1 Tube connections for transducer 

2 V · min adjustment knob 

3 V · max adjustment knob 

4 Span adjustment knob 

5 Connection terminals 

6 �V · adjustment knob 

Type Range 

2 

4 

6 

4 

VVS Unit 

TVZ, TVA, TVR, 

TVRK, TVS, TVM cold 

TVM warm 

TVJ 

1 

1 

Master Slave 

RLE 150 F003 RLE 150 F013 

RLE 150 F002 

RLE 150 F002 

3 

5 

5 

RLE 150 F012 

2 


The electronic Sauter RLE 150 volume flow controller has 

been designed for volume flow control in VAV systems. In 

total the control for 1 room comprises 3 controllers. 


For the variable volume flow control with V . 

min and V . 

max 

serves the master controller in connection with a suitable 

room temperature controller or a DDC substation. 

For this purpose the output signal of the controller is 

switched onto the RLE 150 as command variable. The 

volume flow control can be overrided with switches 

(override control closed and V . 

max). 



The slave controller controls a volume flow as slave 

control loop of another volume flow (master). The most 

frequent application is the supply air/extract air slave 

control. A desired volume flow differential between supply 

air and extract air is adjusted at the slave controller. 

As second command variable the output signal of a room 

pressure controller can be switched on. Also here, override 

controls are possible. 

Room Pressure Controller 

The control of extremely dense rooms is not satisfactorily 

solved with the supply air / extract air slave control. With 

the room pressure controller the differential pressure as 

to a reference room is measured and controlled. The 

function is explained in detail in a separate Trox product 

information. 


The actual value of the volume flow is at both volume 

flow controllers available as linear, electric standard 

signal and can be switched to a DDC or used for indication. 

The voltage range for actual and set value is 

0 to 10 VDC. 


transducer. Therefore the RLE ... is suitable for the 




IMPORTANT 




concerned.



V · nom 

Volume flow 

V · min unit 

0 

V · actual = V · nom . 

U xi 

10 

0 Actual value signal U xi 

10 VDC 

Characteristic of Volume Flow Variable, Master 

V · nom 

Volume flow 

0 

Characteristic of Set Point Adjustment, Slave 

V · nomS 

Volume flow 

slave 

0 

V · set = V · nom . 

V · min 

U w1 

10 

0 Control signal U w1 

V · M �V · 

V 100 · V 

nomM 

· S = + . V · nomS 

�V · 

0 Volume flow master 

V · max 

Adjustment 

range 

10 VDC 

V · nomM 

3 


Volume Flow Measuring 


pressure principle. The effective pressure �p w of the differential 

pressure sensor in the terminal unit allows the 

detection of a partial volume flow passing trough the 

transducer. This partial volume flow which is proportional 

to the total volume flow is measured, temperature compensated 

and linearised with two temperature-dependent 

resistors. 



to the unit nominal volume flow rate (V · nom). The signal is 

processed by a microprocessor. The actual volume flow 

is available as a linear voltage signalU xi. 


controller via the control signal within the limits of V . 

min 

and V . 

max. 

0 to 10 VDC is the voltage range for signal transmission. 

This facilitates an adjustment to the working ranges of 

different room temperature controllers or DDC outstations. 

The set volume flow can be overridden using 

switched controls. The RLE 150 determines the required 

volume flow in accordance with the characteristic shown 

and compares this with the actual value. 

The damper actuator is controlled according to the deviation. 

The Sauter volume flow controller RLE 150 can 

only operate with the matched 3-point actuators. 



of the RLE 150 affects the measured signal. The RLE 150 

is normally calibrated for a vertical position of the membrane, 

i.e. pressure tube connections above or below 

horizontal plane. Other installation positions must be 

specified on order. 


The room temperature controller determines the set volume 

flow using the 0 to 10 VDC command variable within 

the limits of V · min and V · max. The slope (incline) of the 

characteristic remains always unchanged. The voltage is 

limited as to highest and lowest values. The limited voltage 

is connected to terminal w2. Slave Controller 

Usually, the actual value signal of the supply air is given 

as command variable onto the controller. The set volume 

flow is determined under consideration of the differential 

control. The set value can be further adjusted by the 

second command variable input. This possibility is used 

for room pressure controls in cascade with volume flow 

control.



1000 

Pa 

800 

600 

400 

200 

% of V 

Volume flow 

· 20 40 60 80 100 

nom 

V · max 

V · max set value = V · nom 

V · max 

U w2 upper limit = V · nom 


V · nom 

. 100 % 

. 10 VDC 

. 100 % 

V · maxM - V· maxS = V · minM - V · minS 

�V · set value = 

V · min 

�V · 

V · S 

V · nomS 

V · min 

U w2 lower limit = V · nom 

�V · 

V · M 

V · nomM 

V · max 

. 10 VDC 

. 100 

4 



duct pressure, i.e. pressure fluctuations cause no changes 

to volume flow. 




lead to volume flow deviation �V · shown opposite. 






set with a 10 VDC control signal or V · max override control. 


figures relate to V · nom. 

Control signals > U w2 upper limit doesn’t change the flow 

rate. 




set with a 0 VDC control signal or V · min override control. 

V · min may be set between 0 and 100 % of V · nom. The percentage 

figures relate to the V · nom volume flow setting. 

If V · min = 0 %, the damper will be moved to the CLOSED 

position (leakage depends on the type of unit) with a 

control signal of 0 VDC (alternatively 2 VDC). 

Slave Control 

The RLE 150 only provides for ratio control, i.e. the 

supply and extract air must be in the same ratio 


The volume flow ratio is set using the �V · adjustment 


shown opposite. Where the volume flows are the same 

and the units of equal size, the setting will be 0 %. The 

setting range is from – 10 to + 10 %.


Adjustment Knobs RLE 150 (Master) 

Adjustment Knobs RLE 150 (Slave) 


U xi = V· max 

V · nom 

1 2 

3 

6 

3 

1 V · min Adjustment Knob 

2 V · max Adjustment Knob 

3 Span Adjustment Knob 

4 Zero Potentiometer 

5 NZ Potentiometer (Neutral Zone) 

6 �V · Adjustment Knob 

IMPORTANT 

The Span Adjustment Knob must 

not be adjusted. 

. 10 V 

Uxi = V· min 

V · nom 

Formula for Volume Flow Difference 

U xi = U w2 + 

V · S 

V · nomS 

5 

4 

5 

4 


- V· M 

V · nomM 

. 10 V 

. 10 V 

5 


The set volume flow limit values can be adjusted using 

the V · min and V · max adjustment knobs on the RLE 150. 

Calculations are based on the formulae shown on 

page 4. 


• The adjustment knobs for V · min and V · max can within 

the indicated limits be adjusted independently from 

each other. An adjustment of less than 10 % cannot 

be recommended, because of the reduced control 

accuracy. 

• If the V · min adjustment knob is set higher than V · max, 

then the maximum volume flow V · max is constantly 

controlled. 

• A constant volume flow (fixed value) is adjusted using 

the V · min adjustment knob; the V · max adjustment knob 

must be set at 100 %. 

Calculating the Volume Flow Using 

the Actual Value Signal Uxi The accuracy of the setting can be increased if the 

actual value signal Uxi is also measured with the system 

switched on. 


supply voltage for at least 15 minutes before measurements 

begin. 

• Disconnect all the wires from the terminal block, 

except for terminals 1 and 2. 

• Calculate the required value for Uxi at V · max. 

• Insert a link between terminals 8 and 9. 

• Move the V · max adjustment knob until the voltage Uxi corresponds to the calculated value (wait approx. 

2 minutes after the adjustment, then read the voltage). 

• Remove the link between 8 and 9. 

• Calculate the voltage for Uxi at V · min. 

• Proceed with the V · min setting as for V · max. 

• Replace the original wiring. 

• Slave controller: Connect control signal, measure and 

calculate the set value Uxi and then adjust �V · . 


If necessary, the transducer can be adjusted to another 

installation situation by customer using the zero-point 

potentiometer. For measurement the supply voltage at 

the RLE must be alive at least for 15 minutes. The readjustment 

of the zero point is necessary in any case, if 

the U xi signal is measured at removed measuring tubes 

>1 VDC using the following procedure: 

• Remove measuring hoses (tubes). 

• Adjust zero-point potentiometer until the actual value 

output signal U xi is between 0.1 and 0.5 V. 

• Reconnect tubing.

Volume Flow Ranges TVZ, TVA, TVR, TVRK, TVS 

Size 


B x H 

mm 

V · min unit 

l/s m 3 /h 

V · V min unit 

· 1) 1) 

nom 

100 2) 15 95 54 342 

125 20 150 72 540 

160 35 250 126 900 

200 50 405 180 1458 

250 80 615 288 2214 

315 130 1025 468 3690 

400 215 1680 774 6048 


l/s m 3 /h 

to V · nom 

200 x 100 25 215 90 774 

300 x 100 40 320 144 1152 

400 x 100 50 425 180 1530 

500 x 100 65 535 234 1926 

600 x 100 70 650 252 2340 

200 x 200 50 415 180 1494 

300 x 200 70 620 525 2232 

400 x 200 100 825 360 2970 

500 x 200 120 1035 432 3726 

600 x 200 150 1250 540 4500 

700 x 200 165 1450 594 5220 

800 x 200 200 1650 720 5940 

300 x 300 110 920 396 3312 

400 x 300 150 1230 540 4428 

500 x 300 185 1535 666 5526 

600 x 300 240 1850 864 6660 

700 x 300 260 2150 936 7740 

800 x 300 315 2450 1134 8820 

900 x 300 330 2770 1188 9972 

1000 x 300 390 3100 1404 11160 

400 x 400 205 1630 738 5868 

500 x 400 255 2040 918 7344 

600 x 400 315 2450 1134 8820 

700 x 400 355 2850 1278 10260 

800 x 400 420 3250 1512 11700 

900 x 400 455 3670 1638 13212 

1000 x 400 520 4100 1872 14760 

500 x 500 310 2540 1116 9144 

600 x 500 370 3050 1332 10980 

700 x 500 430 3550 1548 12780 

800 x 500 495 4050 1782 14580 

900 x 500 555 4570 1998 16452 

1000 x 500 620 5100 2232 18360 

600 x 600 455 3650 1638 13140 

700 x 600 530 4250 1908 15300 

800 x 600 605 4850 2178 17460 

900 x 600 680 5500 2448 19800 

1000 x 600 755 6100 2718 21960 

700 x 700 605 4950 2178 17820 

800 x 700 690 5700 2484 20520 

900 x 700 780 6400 2808 23040 

1000 x 700 865 7100 3114 25560 

800 x 800 805 6500 2898 23400 

900 x 800 905 7300 3258 26280 

1000 x 800 1005 8100 3618 29160 

900 x 900 1030 8200 3708 29520 

1000 x 900 1145 9100 4122 32760 

1000 x 1000 1285 10100 4626 36360 


V · nom 

6 



to V · nom



Volume flow 


100 5 5 

80 5 5 

60 7 7 

40 7 8 

20 9 14 

15 20 >14 

20 >14 


∆V · in ± % 

TVZ, TVA, TVR, TVRK, TVS TVJ/TVT 

7 





Operating 

mode 

E 

M 

S 

F 


V · min 

V · max 

TVZ-R / 160 / 00 / CB1 / M - 50 - 240 l/s 

TVA-R / 160 / 00 / CC1 / S - 50 - 240 l/s 

TVR / 160 / 00 / CB1 / F - 200 l/s 

TVJ-R / 400 x 107 / 00 / CE1 / M - 200 - 400 l/s 

TVJ-R / 400 x 107 / 00 / CF1 / S - 200 - 400 l/s 


E Individual 

M Master 

S Slave 

F Fixed 

V · min adjustment knob set at required V · min 

V · max adjustment knob set at required V · max 

�V · adjustment knob set at volume flow 

difference to master 



V · max adjustment knob set at 100 %

Volume Flow Range TVM 

Size 


Volume flow 



l/s m 3 /h 

V · min-unit V · V min-unit 

· nom 

TVM cold 

∆V · in ± % 

100 5 7 

80 5 10 

60 5 12 

40 7 15 

30 8 17 

20 9 - 

15 20 - 

20 - 

V · nom 

125 45 150 162 540 

160 75 250 270 900 

200 120 405 432 1458 

250 185 615 666 2214 

TVM total 

8 

Dual Duct Units TVM 



TVM-R / 160 / CD3 / E - 120 - 200 l/s 

TVM-R / 160 / CD3 / F - 150 l/s 


Operating 

Mode 

E 

M 

F 

Operating Mode 

E Individual 

M Master 

F Fixed 


. 

Vwarm . 

Vcold . . 

Vwarm = Vcold Cold Duct Controller Warm Duct Controller 


knob set at 0 % 


knob set at required 

volume flow (V · cold ) 




volume flow V · warm 


knob set at 100 %


Terminal Connections Nomenclature 

Actuator S2 

(Shut 

RLE 150, Master 

off) 

Actuator S2 

(Shut 

RLE 150, Slave off) 

IMPORTANT 


arrangements for volume flow control. The Sauter 




available from Sauter. 

9 

Master and Slave Controller 

1, 7, 11, 13, 15 N : Ground, neutral 

2 L1 : Supply voltage 24 VAC 

3, 4, 5 : Connection actuator (24 VAC) 

6 : Input override control CLOSED 

12 : Output actual volume flow Uxi (0 to 10 VDC) 

Master 

8 : Input override control V · 9 

max 

L1 : Auxiliary voltage for override 

control 

10 : Input set volume flow Uw1 (0 to 10 VDC) 

14 : Output set volume flow Uw2 (0 to 10 VDC) 

Slave 

8 : Input set value 

(Room pressure) w 3, 0 to 10 VDC 

9 N : Ground, neutral 

10 : Input set value (Master) w 2, 

0 to 10 VDC 

Wiring 







to other wires.



24 VAC 

24 VAC 

RT Controller 


Operating Mode E, M 

RLE 150, Parallel Controller, (Master) 

RT Controller 


S2 

S1 



10 



A suitable room temperature controller or a DDC substation 

with 0 - 10 VDC output is connected at least twinwired 

according to wiring diagram (terminal 1 and 10). 

At common voltage supply with 24 VAC it has to be considered 

that terminal 1 at RLE 150 is also ground for the 

command signal. 




If the terminal units are the same size and the V . 

min 

and V . 

max adjustment knobs are set at the same values, 





zero-potential switch contacts supplied by the customer. 

This override control can be used with any controller, 

either separately or centrally, for individual rooms or parts 

of the system. Several volume flow controllers can also 

be actuated using one switch, if a joint ground wire is 

available and the control signal is connected in parallel. 

S1 

Switch 

S2 

Function 

Open 

Closed 

Open 

Open 

Control Mode 

V . 

max 

Open Closed Closed 

Closed Closed Closed


Slave Control 

24 VAC 

U xi 

RT Controller 

Switching V · min , V· max , Closed 



U w2 

RLE 150, Slave 


S2 

S1 



11 






air, as the command signal for the slave volume flow 

controller (master terminal L1 on slave terminal 10). 

Supply/Extract Air Slave Control (Using Uw2) Alternatively to supply/extract air slave control the limited 

set value signal Uw2 (master controller terminal 14 on 

slave controller terminal 10) can command the slave controller. 

The slave controller then controls to the set value 

of the master controller independent of whether this 

value is actually reached at the master controller. 

Any override controls (window switch) must be connected 

to both controllers. 

Switching V · min, V · max, Closed 

By means of simple switches as shown in the wiring 

diagram, it is possible to change over to set values for 

the volume flow. A command signal is not required. 

S1 

Switch 

S2 

Function 

Open 

Closed 

Open 

Open 

Control Mode 

V . 

max 

Open Closed Closed 

Closed Closed Closed


with Dual Duct Unit TVM 

24 VAC 

RT Controller 

Cold Controller RLE 150, (Master) 

Warm Controller RLE 150, (Master) 


Extract Air Controller RLE 150, (Slave) 


12 





circuit diagram opposite (including the 24 VAC crossconnection). 




from 0 to the required V · warm warm as a maximum set 

point. The warm duct controller (V · total is measured) is 

therefore set as a constant value controller and does not 

require a command signal. 





The actual value output signal Uxi of the warm duct controller 

is proportional to the total volume flow V · total. It can 

therefore be used as the command signal for a slave 

controller.


Function Test 


Check wiring 



Measure the set- and actual value (x i, w 2) 


Record actual value signal x i 

for override control V · min 

Record actual value signal x i 

for override control V · max 

yes 


the Sauter specifications? 

yes 

Actual value signal U xi 

consistent? 

yes 

Actuator opens and closes? 

yes 


yes 


yes 


yes 


no 

no 

no 

no 

no 

no 

no 

no 

Order Example Spare Controller 



etc. 


Actuator rotation correct? 

Damper obstructed? 

Duct pressure 

sufficient? 

Measuring tubing to 

the transmitter 

demaged? 

Check room 

temperature controller 

Check window 


Sauter RLE 150 F003 

preset for TVR / 125 / M - 140 - 300 m 3 /h 

13 

Commissioning 


measuring the signals U xi and U w2. If U xi and U w2 are 

identical, the required volume flow is reached. If the voltages 

deviate, the control procedure has not yet been 

finished. 

If the commissioning procedure is to include verification 

of the set volume flows V · min and V · max, these must be set 

as described below. The actual value signal U xi is measured 

in each operating situation and the volume flow is 

then calculated using the formulae given on page 4. 



ensure that all connections are correct. All wires except 

terminals 1 and 2 should be disconnected before the following 

checks are made. 


openedmanually, the voltage U xi must increase. 

Connect the actuator (terminal 3, 4 and 5), link terminals 

6 and 7: The actuator must close. 

Change link terminal 6 to terminal 8 and 9: The actuator 

must open again. 

Without link: The RLE 150 controls V · min. If U w2 = U xi, calculate 

the volume flow and compare it with label. 

Link terminals 8 and 9: Repeat measurement for V · max, as 

described above. 

Remove link and apply the command signal w 1. Calculate 

the set volume flow and compare it with the actual 

volume flow. 

Apply override controls and test the desired functions in 

sequence. 



set for the terminal unit and size must be used. Uncalibrated 

controllers can only be used as a temporary solution. 


controller: 




• V · min and V · max

Sauter RLE, Room Pressure Control 

1 

Contents 

Subject Page 





Single-Duct Units 6 




Design changes reserved · All rights reserved · ® Gebrüder Trox GmbH (12/2001) · Leaflet No. E016MM3

RLE 150 F100, Room Pressure Controller 

3 4 

2 

RLE 150 (Auxiliary Controller) 

1 Tube connections for transducer 

2 Span �p adjustment knob 

3 Xs adjustment knob 

4 Xp adjustment knob 

5 Connection terminals 

6 �V · adjustment knob 

Type Range 

6 

2 

VVS Unit 

TVZ, TVA, TVR 

TVJ 

1 

1 

Auxiliary 

Controller 

RLE 150 F013 

RLE 150 F012 

5 

5 

RLE 150 F100 


Room Pressure 

Controller 

2 


The pneumatic Sauter RLE 150 room pressure controller 

has been designed for the high or low pressure control of 

dense rooms. The room pressure is controlled using the 

master-and-slave system (cascade-controlled) by a 

Sauter RLE 150 F012/F013 flow volume controller, which 

controls the flow volume control unit in supply air or 

extract air. In total the control for 1 room comprises 

3 controllers. 



solved with the supply/extract air slave control, as measuring 

and control tolerances as well as the unknown 

density degree of the room may lead to undesirably high 

room pressures or to room pressures with wrong signs. 

With the room pressure controller the differential pressure 

as to a reference room is measured and controlled. The 

set volume flow of the slave controller is within a limited 

range in addition to the master controller influenced by 

the room pressure controller. 


For the variable volume flow control with V · min and V · max 

limitation serves the master controller in connection with 

a suitable room temperature controller. 


The slave controller controls a volume flow as cascade 

control loop of another volume flow (master). As a 

second command variable the output signal of the room 

pressure controller is switched on (activated). 

Master and slave controller are explained in detail in a 

separate Trox product information (EØ16MB7). 

The actual values of room pressure and volume flows are 

available as linear electric standard signals and can be 

used for indication. The voltage range for actual and set 

value is 0 to 10 VDC. 



transducer. Therefore the RLE ... is suitable for the 




IMPORTANT 




concerned.




Room pressure 

difference 

0 

0 5 



Auxiliary Controller 

‡ nom 

Volume flow 


‡ min unit 

0 0 Actual value signal Uxi 

Characteristic of Set Point Adjustment 


‡ nomS 

Volume flow 


+20 

(+50) 

-20 

(-50) 

0 

‡ actual = ‡ nom . U xi 

10 

‡M Uw2-5 

‡nomM 50 

‡ S =( + ) .‡ nomS 

�‡ 

0 Volume Flow Master 

10 VDC 

Adjustment 

range 

10 VDC 

‡ nomM 

3 



The room pressure1) is measured on the static differential 

pressure principle. One measuring point each for static 

pressure is provided in the room to be controlled and in 

the reference room. If several rooms are switched one 

behind the other in pressure cascade, a neutral reference 

pressure is recommended, i.e. corridor, which must be 

free from wind influence and other pressure fluctuations. 

These pressures (room pressure differentials) are measured 

by a membrane pressure transducer. The actual 

room pressure value is available as voltage signal Uxi The 

set room pressure is adjusted or predetermined by the 

command variable as 0 to 10 VDC signal. The controller 

compares the required room pressure with the actual 

value. Corresponding to the control deviation the influence 

onto the slave controller is changed. The room 

pressure control shows PI behaviour. 



pressure principle. For further explanations please refer 

to the separate Trox product information EØ16MB7, 

page 3. 

Usually the actual value signal of the supply air is is given 

onto the controller as command variable and the set 

volume flow is determined under consideration of the differential 

control. The second command variable input 

(room pressure controller) results in a further adjustment 

of the set value. The controller determines the required 

volume flow according to the characteristics as shown 

and compares this with the actual value. The damper 

actuator is controlled according to the control deviation. 

The optimum control parameters are adjusted and sealed 

in the factory. To the RLE controllers belong 3-point actuators. 



of the RLE affects the measured signal. The RLE is normally 




order. 

1) For simplification the room pressure differential is referred to as 

room pressure in this leaflet.

Control Behaviour after Alteration of Disturbance 


Pressure 

differential 

Room pressure 

difference 

0 

1000 

Pa 

800 

600 

400 

200 

Door open 

‡ min 

Time 

20 40 60 80 100 

% of ‡ nom 

Volume flow 

Formula for Room Pressure Control 

�p set value = 

Door closed 

�‡ �‡ 

�p 

�p nom 

‡ max 

. 100 % 


4 


As the room pressure controller works with PI characteristic 

(proportional-integral) the required room pressure is 

theoretically always obtained. Deviations are only given 

by the measuring tolerance of the room pressure transducer 

(component in RLE). It is, however, a prerequisite 

that the room has the density required, in order to 

achieve the required room pressure from the volume flow 

differential between between supply air and extract air. 

The room pressure height, which results from alterations 

of disturbances (door closed) as well as the setting 

(stabilization) time required depends i. a. on the duct 

pressures in the supply and extract air system, room 

density and air change (rate) (volume flow/contents). 



duct pressure, i.e. pressure fluctuations cause no 





lead to volume flow deviation �V · shown opposite. 




Room Pressure Adjustment 

The required room pressure is adjusted at the Xs adjustment 

knob. The adjustment range reaches from –20 to 

+20 Pa and/or –50 to +50 Pa. If the room pressure is 

variable, e.g. changeover high/low pressure, the adjustment 

knob must be set to left-hand stop (–20 Pa / –50 

Pa). If necessary, the lower pressure value can be limited. 

Adjustment of Volume Flow Differential 

The �V · adjustment knob of the slave controller must be 

set to –10 % in order to obtain an unobjectionable functioning 

of room pressure control. When ordering, the 

appertaining master unit must be indicated as well. The 

master unit must be of equal size. Please, consult Trox in 

case of deviations.


Adjustment Knobs 150 F100 

(Room Pressure Controller) 

IMPORTANT 

� � 

� 

Adjustment Knobs RLE 150 (Auxiliary Controller) 

1 Span �p Adjustment Knob 

2 X s Adjustment Knob 

3 X p Adjustment Knob 

4 T n Potentiometer (reset time) 

5 Zero Potentiometer (Zero point) 

6 �V · Adjustment Knob 

7 NZ Potentiometer (hysteresis) 

� 

� 

6 

7 

1 5 

The Span Adjustment Knob must not be adjusted 

on both controllers. 

5 


A subsequent adjustment of the room pressure set value 

can be made at the Xs-adjustment knob of the RLE 150. 

Calculation is made according to formula on page 4. 


If necessary, the transducer can be adjusted to another 

installation situation by customer using the zero-point 

potentiometer. For measurement the supply voltage at 

the RLE must be alive at least for 15 minutes. The readjustment 

of the zero point is necessary in any case, if 

the Uxi signal is measured at removed measuring tubes 

>1 VDC (outside 4.9 to 5.1 VDC at room pressure controller) 

using the following procedure: 

• Remove measuring tubes 

• Adjust zero point potentiometer until the actual value 

output signal Uxi is between 0.1 and 0.3 V at the slave 

controller and/or 4.9 and 5.1 V at the room pressure 

controller. 

• Reconnect tubing

Volume Flow Ranges TVZ, TVA, TVR 

Size 

V 

100 95 342 

125 150 540 

160 250 900 

200 405 1458 

250 615 2214 

315 1025 3690 

400 1680 6048 

· nom 

l/s m3 /h 

1) 


B x H 

mm 

V · nom 

l/s m 3 /h 

200 x 100 215 774 

300 x 100 425 1530 

400 x 100 650 2340 

500 x 100 825 2970 

600 x 100 1250 4500 

200 x 200 1650 5940 

300 x 200 1850 6660 

400 x 200 2450 8820 

500 x 200 3100 11160 

600 x 200 2450 8820 

700 x 200 3250 11700 

800 x 200 4100 14760 

300 x 300 320 1152 

400 x 300 535 1926 

500 x 300 415 1494 

600 x 300 620 2232 

700 x 300 1035 3726 

800 x 300 1450 5220 

900 x 300 920 3312 

1000 x 300 1230 4428 

400 x 400 1535 5526 

500 x 400 2150 7740 

600 x 400 2770 9972 

700 x 400 1630 5868 

800 x 400 2040 7344 

900 x 400 2850 10260 

1000 x 400 3670 13212 

500 x 500 2540 9144 

600 x 500 3050 10980 

700 x 500 3550 12780 

800 x 500 4050 14580 

900 x 500 4570 16452 

1000 x 500 5100 18360 

600 x 600 3650 13140 

700 x 600 4250 15300 

800 x 600 4850 17460 

900 x 600 5500 19800 

1000 x 600 6100 21960 

700 x 700 4950 17820 

800 x 700 5700 20520 

900 x 700 6400 23040 

1000 x 700 7100 25560 

800 x 800 6500 23400 

900 x 800 7300 26280 

1000 x 800 8100 29160 

900 x 900 8200 29520 

1000 x 900 9100 32760 

1000 x 1000 10100 36360 

1) Only TVR 


6 




TVA-R / 160 / 00 / CJ1 / A - - 15 Pa 

TVR / 16 / 00 / CJ1 / Z - + 15 Pa 

TVJ / 400 x 107 / 00 / CL1 / A - + 15 Pa 


Volume flow 


100 5 5 

80 5 5 

60 7 7 

40 7 8 

20 9 14 

15 20 >14 

20 >14 

2) Percentages figures based on ‡ actual 

Installation place 

Z Supply Air 

A Extract Air 

When ordering, the appertaining master unit must be 

indicated as well. The master unit must be of equal size. 

Please, consult Trox in case of deviations. 

Room Pressure Parameters 


Room pressure adjustment knob 

set at required room pressure 



�V · Adjustment knob set at –10 % 

∆V · in ± % 

TVZ, TVA, TVR TVJ



RLE 150 Room pressure controller 

Actuator S2 

(Shut off) 

RLE 150 Auxiliary controller 

IMPORTANT 








Reference 

room 

Room 

7 

Nomenclature 




3 : Output actual volume Uxi (0 to 10 VDC) 

5 : Output set volume Uw3 (0 to 10 VDC) 

7 : Input set room pressure Uxs (0 to 10 VDC) 

9 : Output set volume Uw Inv 

(0 to 10 VDC) 




3, 4, 5 : Connection actuator (24 VAC) 

6 : Input override control CLOSED 

8 : Input set value 2 Uw3 (0 to 10 VDC) 

10 : Input set value 1 Uw2 (0 to 10 VDC) 

12 : Output actual volume flow Uxi (0 to 10 VDC) 

Wiring 









Tube dimensions : di = 6 mm 

max. lengths : 10 m (plus and minus 

in total) 1) 


The RLP 150 is tube-connected according to the sketch 

shown. The measuring points in the room and reference 

room must be free from any turbulences (no influence 

due to room flow, no dynamic share pd). The room pressure is always connected to the plus input, 

also at low pressure control. 

Note: 

If room groups with different pressure stages are 

arranged one behind the other, all transducers shall 

operate with a common reference pressure, e.g. 

atmospheric pressure. 

1) Recommendation


24 VAC 


RLE 150, Slave 

RT Controller 


RLE 150, Room pressure controller 

Operating Mode A 

1) For room pressure control with slave for supply air (mode Z) 

link terminals 9 and 8. 

1) 


8 


The slave controller will have two command variables. 

The first determines the actual value – in most cases of 

the supply air. The second command variable comes 

from the room pressure controller. 

Single-wiring is possible, if already by the supply voltage 

a common ground is given. Twin-wiring is to be preferred 

because of the electromagnetic compatibility. 


The room pressure controller should be assembled close 

to the room and/or reference room in order to keep the 

tube lengths of the measurement lines short. 


Override Controls are possible. For further information 

please refer to the product information for Sauter 

RLE 150 (leaflet No. EØ16MB7).


Function Test 


Check wiring 



Check Master and Slave Controller 

Check Room Pressure Controller 


yes 


the Sauter specifications? 

yes 


consistent? 

yes 

Actuator open or closed? 

no 

no 

no 

no 




etc. 

Connect room 

pressure at plus 

Room pressure set value 

to high? Room leaky? 

Room pressure controller Sauter RLE 150 F 100 

preset at +15 Pa 

Auxiliary controller Sauter RLE 150 F 013 

preset at TVA 160 

9 

Commissioning 

For commissioning it is best to first disconnect (remove) 

the command variable of the room pressure controller 

(slave controller: terminal 8). With the doors open, master 

and slave controller are set in operation according to 

Trox product information (RLE 150, EØ16MB7). Then 

reconnect command variable, shut the doors and check 

room pressure (smoke checks). 

If the blade of the extract air unit is closed manually 

(disengagement of actuator and adjustment of blade 

using a tong to avoid injuries), the room pressure and 

correspondingly U xi must increase. 

The set value of the room pressure is reached, when the 

room pressure determined from the U xi measured is in 

conformity with the set value. If this is not the case, the 

room leakage is too high. The set value has to be reduced. 

If the room proves to be non-air-tight, the room 

pressure control cannot function. The room is then to be 

taken into operation with the supply air/extract air slave 

control. 





solution. 


controller: Room pressure, V · min and V · max.

Sauter RLP 10 

1 

Contents 

Subject Page 





Volume Flow Ranges Single-Duct Units 6 

Order Code, Examples Single-Duct Units 

7 

Dual-Duct Unit TVM 8 

Tube Connections 9 

Room Temperatur Control 10 



with Dual Duct Unit TVM 12 


Design changes reserved · All rights reserved · ® Gebrüder Trox GmbH (12/2001) · Leaflet No. E016MH0

RLP 10 

� 

� 

� 

� RLP 10 controller 

� Tube connections 

� V · min adjustment knob 

� V · max adjustment knob 

Type Range 

Actuator 

to Trox-differential 

pressure sensor 

Controller 

Normally OPEN (NO) RLP 10 F905 

Normally CLOSED (NZ) 

� 

RLP 10 F001 

2 


Sauter RLP 10 

The RLP 10 pneumatic volume flow controller from 

Sauter is designed for VAV terminal units. The controller 

comprises a membrane pressure transducer. 

For variable volume flow control a suitable pneumatic 

room temperature controller must be used. 

The output signal from this controller serves as command 

variable for the RLP 10. 

Pneumatic switches are used for override control. The 


linear, pneumatic signal. This signal can be used for 

example to control a slave unit for extract air. 

The RLP 10 has adjustment knobs for setting V · min and 

V · max. All controller adjustments are set by Trox and the 

unit is supplied with settings sealed. No adjustment is 

necessary by the customer. As soon as the operating 

pressure and theroom temperature controller have been 

connected, the terminal unit is ready for use. Any volume 

flow changes which may be necessary to the RLP 10 can 

easily be carried out by the customer. 

For parallel operation, several RLP 10 controllers can be 

connected up to one room thermostat, if the air handling 

capacity of the room temperature controller is not exceeded. 

Supply/extract air slave control is possible. 



transducer. Therefore the RLP 10 is suitable for the 



plastic should be considered in such situations. For the 

control of extract air contaminated with chemicals, only a 

special design should be used which blows through the 

high and low pressure measurement tubes. 

IMPORTANT 




concerned.

Sauter RLP 10 


Volume flow 

(100 %) 

V · (20%) 

V · I = p 3 . V · nom 


V · nom 

V · max 

V · min 

V · (20%) 

Volume flow V · nom 

1) Limited by V · min and V · max 

0.2 Actual value 

signal p3 1.0 bar 

V · 1) 

S = p . 

6 V 

· 

nom 

0.2 Control signal p 1.0 bar 

6 

3 


The volume flow is measured by the static differential 

pressure principle. The differential pressure sensor in the 

terminal unit measures the effective pressure �p e. This 

causes a membrane in the pressure transducer to 

deflect. The movement is detected and converted into a 

linear pneumatic signal 0 to 1.0 bar for actual volume 

flow. 

The measurement range is set during factory calibration 

to suit the unit size, so that 1.0 bar always corresponds 

to the unit nominal volume flow rate (V · nom, except slaves 

and TVM warm duct controllers). 

The actual volume flow can be shown by a gauge with 

very low air capacity or using a split signal relay be used 

to command extract air. 


controller with the command signal within the limits of 

V · min and V · max . The RLP 10 determines the required volume 

flow in accordance with the characteristic shown and 

compares this with the actual value. The damper actuator 

is controlled according to the deviation. The volume 

flow control is integral action. The controller RLP 10 is 

used with a specific Trox actuator. The controller is 

adjusted to the correct action of the damper (normally 

open/close) during factory calibration. 


Because of the weight of the membrane the position of 

the RLP 10 affects the measurement signal. The RLP 10 

is normally calibrated for a vertical position of the membrane, 

i.e. pressure tube connections above or below 

horizontal plane. Other installation positions must be 

specified on order.



‡ max set value 

p 6 upper limit 

‡ min set value 

p 6 lower limit 

‡ maxM 

‡ minM 

Volume flow 

= 

= 

= 

= 

= 

‡ max 

‡ nom 

‡ max 

‡ nom 

‡ min 

‡ nom 

‡ min 

‡ nom 

‡ maxS 

‡ minS 

. 

. 

100 % 

100 % 

% of ‡ nom 

4 



pressure, which means that pressure fluctuations do not 

cause permanent volume flow changes. 

The hysteresis of the controller, coupled with measuring 

tolerances, produces a volume flow deviation shown 

opposite. 

If the conditions mentioned in the leaflet are not met, 

(e.g. lowest differential pressure, supply air conditions) 


Volume Flow Command Signal 

The control characteristic of the thermostat signal is limited 

by V · min at the bottom end and V · max at the top end. 

Thus control signals below the pressure corresponding to 

V · min (p6 lower limit) and above the V · max(p6 upper limit) do not 

lead to any volume flow changes. 



set with a command signal greater p 6 upper limit (max. 

1 bar) or V · max override control. The setting range is from 

0 to 100 %. The percentage based on V · nom. 


Sauter RLP 10 


set with a command signal lower p 6 lower limit or V · min override 

control. The setting range is from 20 to 100 %. The 

percentage based on V · nom. V · min can be set to 0. To do 

this, the adjustment knob must be turned anti-clockwise 

beyond the 20 % stop by approximately one quarter turn 

until an audible click is heard. 

Slave Control 

The RLP 10 only provides for ratio control, i.e. the 



The volume flow ratio is set during factory calibration 

controller internally.

Sauter RLP 10 

Adjustment Knobs 



�p w-‡min 

�p w-‡max 

= 

= 

( 

( 

‡ min 

C 

‡ max 

C 

( 

( 

2 

2 

5 




using the V · min and V · max adjustment knobs on the 

RLP 10. Calculations are based on the formulae shown 

on page 4. 


• The adjustment knobs for V · min and V · max can be set 

within the given limits independently. V · min values lower 

20 % should not be set as the volume flow deviations 

increase. 

• A constant volume flow is set at the V · min adjustment 

knob. The V · max adjustment knob has to be at 100 %. 

• If the V · min adjustment knob is set higher than V · max, the 

maximum volume flow is constantly controlled. 


Using the Effective Pressure 

The accuracy of the setting can be increased if the effective 

pressure signal Dp e is also measured with the 

system switched on. 

• Remove the tube from connection 6 (command signal) 

so that the controller runs at V · min. Do not seal the connecting 

nipple. 

• Calculate the effective pressure for V · min. 

• Tune V · min adjustment knob until the effective pressure 

corresponds to the calculated value (after adjustment, 

wait until the controller has settled and the actuator 

stopped). 

• Close connection 6 with a cap or sealed tube. The 

controller runs at V · max. 

• Calculate the effective pressure for V · max. 

• Proceed with the V · max setting as for V · min. 

• Replace original tube connections. 

The C values for the above calculations are given in the 

VARYCONTROL Product Information under the heading 

“Commissioning”.


Size 

100 2) 20 95 72 342 

125 30 150 108 540 

160 50 250 180 900 

200 80 405 288 1458 

250 125 615 450 2214 

315 205 1025 738 3690 

400 3) 340 1680 1224 6048 


B x H 

mm 

V · min-unit 

l/s m 3 /h 

V · to V min-unit 

· 1) 1) 

nom 


to V · nom 

l/s m 3 /h 

V · nom 

200 x 100 45 215 162 774 

300 x 100 65 320 234 1152 

400 x 100 85 425 306 1530 

500 x 100 105 535 378 1926 

600 x 100 130 650 468 2340 

200 x 200 85 415 306 1494 

300 x 200 125 620 450 2232 

400 x 200 165 825 594 2970 

500 x 200 205 1035 738 3726 

600 x 200 250 1250 900 4500 

700 x 200 290 1450 1044 5220 

800 x 200 330 1650 1188 5940 

300 x 300 185 920 666 3312 

400 x 300 245 1230 882 4428 

500 x 300 305 1535 1098 5526 

600 x 300 370 1850 1332 6660 

700 x 300 430 2150 1548 7740 

800 x 300 490 2450 1764 8820 

900 x 300 555 2770 1998 9972 

1000 x 300 620 3100 2232 11160 

400 x 400 325 1630 1170 5868 

500 x 400 410 2040 1476 7344 

600 x 400 490 2450 1764 8820 

700 x 400 570 2850 2052 10260 

800 x 400 650 3250 2340 11700 

900 x 400 735 3670 2646 13212 

1000 x 400 820 4100 2952 14760 

500 x 500 510 2540 1836 9144 

600 x 500 610 3050 2196 10980 

700 x 500 710 3550 2556 12780 

800 x 500 810 4050 2916 14580 

900 x 500 915 4570 3294 16452 

1000 x 500 1020 5100 3672 18360 

600 x 600 730 3650 2628 13140 

700 x 600 850 4250 3060 15300 

800 x 600 970 4850 3492 17460 

900 x 600 1100 5500 3960 19800 

1000 x 600 1220 6100 4392 21960 

700 x 700 990 4950 3564 17820 

800 x 700 1140 5700 4104 20520 

900 x 700 1280 6400 4608 23040 

1000 x 700 1420 7100 5112 25560 

800 x 800 1300 6500 4680 23400 

900 x 800 1460 7300 5256 26280 

1000 x 800 1620 8100 5832 29160 

900 x 900 1640 8200 5904 29520 

1000 x 900 1820 9100 6552 32760 

1000 x 1000 2020 10100 7272 36360 

1) V · min = 0 is also possible 2) Only TVR 3) Not for TVRK 

6 


Sauter RLP 10 

V · nom

Sauter RLP 10 


Volume flow 


100 5 5 

80 5 5 

60 5 6 

40 7 8 

20 10 11 

10 >11 


∆V · in ± % 

TVZ, TVA, TVR TVJ/TVT 

7 




Volume Flow Parameter 

Operating 

Mode 

E 

M 

S 

F 


V · min 

V · max 

TVR / 160 / 00 / PA1 / E - 70 - 240 l/s 

TVZ-R / 160 / 00 / PD1 / M - 70 - 240 l/s 

TVA-R / 160 / 00 / PA1 / S - 70 - 240 l/s 

Operation Mode 

E Individual 

M Master 

S Slave 

F Fixed 



V · min adjustment knob turned anticlockwise 

for 0 % setting 

V · max adjustment knob set at 100 % 

Volume flow ratio to master is adjusted 

internally 



V · max adjustment knob set at 100 %


Size ‡ minunit 


Volume flow 


l/s m 3 /h 

V · nom 

‡ Ref- 

Warm 

V · 1) 1) 

nom 

TVM cold 

‡ minunit 

∆V · in ± % 

1) ‡ Ref is only a reference value for calculating ‡ actual. 

In the formula ‡ Ref is setted as ‡ nom. 

2) Percentage figures based on ‡ actual. 

TVM total 

100 5 7 

80 5 10 

60 5 12 

40 7 15 

30 8 17 

20 10 - 

10 - 

‡ Ref- 

Warm 

125 45 150 190 162 540 684 

160 75 250 325 270 900 1170 

200 120 405 490 432 1458 1764 

250 185 615 685 666 2214 2466 

8 




TVM-R / 160 / P14 / E - 100 - 200 l/s 

TVM-R / 160 / P14 / F - 200 l/s 


Operating 

Mode 

E 

M 

F 


E Individual 

M Master 

F Fixed 


. 

Vwarm . 

Vcold . . 

Vwarm = Vcold Cold Controller Warm Controller 


knob turned 

anti-clockwise for 

0 % setting 



V · cold 

Sauter RLP 10 


knob set at 

required V · warm 


knob set at 100 %

Sauter RLP 10 

Tube Connections Nomenclature 

IMPORTANT 





and tube sizing. 

PN 21, DW 

Volume flow 

V · nom 

V · max 

V · min 

V · (20%) 

PN 61, DW 

Volume flow 

V · nom 

V · max 

V · min 

V · (20%) 

1 6 3 1) 2 

– + 


6 

Control signal RT 2) 

0.2 0.6 1.0 bar 

1) Operation mode E, F and S: closed 

2) The room temperature controller must be connected 

on sequenzing relay 

9 

+ High pressure take off from differential pressure 

sensor 

- Low pressure take off from differential pressure 

sensor 

1 Operating pressure input (1.3 bar, ± 0.1 bar) 

2 Actuator output (0.2 to 1.0 bar) 

3 Actual volume flow output (0.2 to 1.0 bar) 

6 Set volume flow input (0.2 to 1.0 bar) 


The differential pressure sensor of the terminal unit and 

the actuator are connected by tube to the volume flow 

controller in the factory. The operating pressure and the 

thermostat must be connected by the customer. Ensure 

that the operating compressed air meets the requirements 

in the Sauter documentation. It has to be considered 

that the operating pressure air must meet the requirements 

for conditioned instrument compressed air 

(free from oil, dust and water). 

Control Sequences 

The adjustment signal of the room temperature controller 

can be divided into sequences if a water valve is to be 

controlled in addition to the volume flow. Adjustment to 

the pressure range of the thermostat is made by a 

sequence or sequence reversing relay. 

PN21, DA (direct action) 

Control signal 0.2 to 1.0 bar gives rise in volume flow. 

PN61, DA (direct action) 

Control Signal 0.6 to 1.0 bar gives rise in volume flow. 

Fail Safe Direction of Actuator 

If the operating pressure fails or is disconnected, the 

actuator moves to a defined end position. This can be 

open or closed damper position. Selection of the fail safe 

direction allows system-specific safety requirements. 

NC (normally closed): Damper closed with no pressure 

NO (normally open) : Damper open with no pressure

Room Temperatur Control 

(PN 21, DW) 

Operating 

pressure 

supply 1.3 bar 

RLP 10 


controller, 

DW 

RLP 10, Parallel controller 

Raumtemperature Control with Heating Sequence 

(PN 61, DW) 

Operating 

pressure 


RLP 10 




controller, 

DW 

1) Sequence relay contained in Trox scope of supply 

2) Restrictor by customer 

2) 

1) 


Heating valve 

0.2 to 0.6 bar, NO 

10 

Room Thermostat 

Sauter RLP 10 

The RLP 10 volume flow controller should be connected 

to room thermostats according to the connection diagramsshown. 

The volume flow controllers release compressed air via 

the input connection. Thus the room thermostat can be 

connected with one line only. The room thermostat must 

have sufficient air handling capacity for the volume flow 

controller. If several volume flow controllers are connected 

to one room thermostat, the sum of the air capacities 

of all volume flow controllers must be taken into account. 

If this exceeds the maximum air handling capacity of the 

room thermostat, split signal relays must be used. If the 

line from the thermostat to the volume flow controller 

contains a split signal relay, a non venting thermostat can 

be used. 




If the terminal units are the same size and the V · min 

and V · max adjustment knobs are set at the same values, 



If several controllers are connected to one room temperature 

controller, the sum of the air capacities of all 

volume flow controllers has to be considered. 

If this amount exceeds the maximum air capacity of the 

room temperature controller, split signal relays have to be 

used. 

External Operating Pressure Connections 

The volume flow controllers RLP 10 can be connected 

directly to the operating pressure supply as they have an 

internal restrictor. If the signal from the room thermostat 

is divided into several sequences and a sequencing relay 

connected, a supply pressure must be supplied to the 

thermostat. The correct sizing of the restrictor must take 

into account the heating valve actuator. Noise from the 

room thermostat will occur if the restrictor is too small.

Sauter RLP 10 

Room Temperature Control with Shut Off Mode 

(PN 21, DW, NZ) 

Operating 

pressure 


RLP 10 


S1 

S1 System shut off switch 

S2 Window switch 

Operating 

pressure 



controller, 

DW 


297690 


controller, 

DW 

RLP 10, Supply Air 

Actuator 

1) Split relay on request contained in Trox scope of supply 

1) 


RLP 10, Extract Air 


S2 

11 

Shut Off Control 


the customer’s pneumatic switches. 

The override control for full shut off can take place on all 

or separate terminat units. A break in the pressure line to 

the controlter or actuator leads to closure of the damper 

when fail safe direction of action is normally closed. With 

this override control, and unit type TVZ/TVA/TVR/TVM, 

full shut off leakage air volume flows to DIN 1946 part 4 

are achieved. With TVM units, note that the override control 

must be switched to both controllers. 

S1, S2 closed: Room temperature control mode 

S1 or S2 open: Override control 

Safety Function “Damper Open” 

If, for safety reasons, ventilation must be guaranteed for 

certain building sections, actuators with fail safe direction 

normally open (open under no pressure) must be used. In 

the event of failure of the compressed air supply, the 

damper always opens. 


Supply air/extract air slave control is possible using the 

actual value of the supply air as a control signal for the 

control of extract air, if RLP 10 is used for supply air and 

a second volume flow controller for the extract air. Only 

ratio control can be achieved, i.e. supply and extract air 

must remain in the same ratio. 

The separating relay in the control line is factory-fitted a 

short distance from the supply air controller. It must not 

be moved.


with Dual Duct Unit TVM 

Operating 

pressure 


1 6 

RLP 10, Cold 

1 6 

297690 

1 

RLP 10, Warm 

1 6 

RLP 10, Slave 


controller, 

DW 

1) 




2 

3 

3 

TVM 

12 


Sauter RLP 10 


warm) must be tubed by the customer as shown in the 

circuit diagram opposite (including the operating pressure 

supply cross-connection). 




from 0 to the required V · warm as a maximum set point. The 

warm duct controller (V · total is measured) is therefore set 

as a constant value controller and does not require a 

command signal. 




with Dual Duct TVM 

The actual value output signal p3 of the warm duct controller 

is proportional to the total volume flow V · total. It can 

therefore be used as the command signal for a slave 

controller.

Sauter RLP 10 

Function Test 


Test tubing Connect 

supply compressed air 

Connect air conditioning system 

Check operating pressure 

Override control V · min 

Record actual value signal ∆p w 

Override control V · max 


Operating pressure due 

to Sauter requirements? 

yes 


and closing? 

yes 


yes 


yes 


control? 

yes 


no 

no 

no 

no 

no 

no 


Check pressure 


Fail safe direction 

OK? Controller faulty 

Duct pressure 

sufficient? 

Measurement 

tubing to Sensor 

damaged? 

Check room 

thermostat 

Check window 


Sauter RLP 10 

preset for TVZ 125, 80 ... 140 l/s, PN21, DW, NZ 

13 

Commissioning 

A rapid function test for commissioning can be carried 

out with the system running and the operating pressure 

present. Remove the tube from the connection to the 

operating pressure supply. If compressed air escapes 

from the line, this shows that the controller is supplied 

with compressed air. After replacing the tube, the actuator 

must return to approximately the same position it held 

before the test. If commissioning involves proving the 

limit volume flows V · min and V · max these must be set as 

described below. 

For each operating situation, the effective pressure (∆p w ) 

is measured at the Trox differential pressure sensor and 

the volume flow calculated: 

V · actual = C . �p w 

In many cases, incorrect tube connections or insufficient 

operating pressure are the cause of the faults. 

Therefore for a detailed test on each volume flow controller, 

first remove the signal from the room thermostat and 

then measure the operating pressure. 

Remove the high pressure and low pressure lines on the 

volume flow controller and connect a manometer. The 

actuator must open and the effective pressure (∆p e ) must 

rise. 

Reconnect the high pressure line, the actuator must now 

close and the effective pressure must fall. 

Connect the low pressure line. The controller must control 

to V · min. Measure effective pressure, calculate volume 

flow and compare with designed value. 

Close off connection 6 for room thermostat. The controller 

must control to V · max. Repeat measurement for V · max 

as described above. 

Measure control signal p 6 and connect. Calculate set 

volume flow and compare with actual volume flow. 

Activate override controls and check operation. 


To replace faulty controllers, only controllers set for the 

terminal unit type and size must be used. Unadjusted 

controllers are only acceptable as a temporary solution. 

When ordering spare controllers, state V · min and V · max.

Sauter RLP 100 

1 

Contents 

Subject Page 






Order Code, Examples Single-Duct Units 

7 






RLP 100 

� 

� 

� 

� RLP 100 controller 



� E adjustment knob 

� V · max adjustment knob 

Type Range 

Actuator 

Normally CLOSED (NZ) 

to Trox-differential 

pressure sensor 

� 

� 

Controller 

Normally OPEN (NO) RLP 100 F002 

RLP 100 F001 

2 



The RLP 100 pneumatic volume flow controller from 

Sauter is designed for VAV terminal units. The controller 

comprises a membrane pressure transducer. 

For variable volume flow control a suitable pneumatic 

room temperature controller must be used. The output 

signal from this controller serves as command variable 

for the RLP 100. 

Pneumatic switches are used for override control. The 


linear, pneumatic signal. This signal can be used for 

example to control a slave unit for extract air. 

The RLP 100 has adjustment knobs for setting V · min and 

V · max. All controller adjustments are set by Trox and the 

unit is supplied with settings sealed. No adjustment is 

necessary by the customer. As soon as the operating 

pressure and the room temperature controller have been 

connected, the terminal unit is ready for use. Any volume 

flow changes which may be necessary to the RLP 100 

can easily be carried out by the customer. 

For parallel operation, several RLP 100 controllers can be 

connected up to one room thermostat, if the air handling 

capacity of the room temperature controller is not exceeded. 

Supply/extract air slave control is possible. 



transducer. Therefore the RLP 100 is suitable for the 



plastic should be considered in such situations. For the 

control of extract air contaminated with chemicals, only a 

special design should be used which blows through the 

high and low pressure measurement tubes. 

IMPORTANT 




concerned.



Volume flow 

V · I = p M . V · nom 


Volume flow 

V · nom 

(100 %) 

V · (20 %) 

V · nom 

V · max 

V · min 

V · (20 %) 

1) Limited by V · min and V · max 

0.2 Actual value 

signal pM 1.0 bar 

V · 1) 

S = p . 

6 V 

· 

nom 

0.2 

Control signal p 

1.0 bar 

6 

3 


The volume flow is measured by the static differential 

pressure principle. The differential pressure sensor in the 

terminal unit measures the effective pressure ∆p e . This 

causes a membrane in the pressure transducer to 

deflect. The movement is detected and converted into a 

linear pneumatic signal 0 to 1.0 bar for actual volume 

flow. 

The measurement range is set during factory calibration 

to suit the unit size, so that 1.0 bar always corresponds 

to the unit nominal volume flow rate (V · nom, except slaves 

and TVM warm duct controllers). 

The actual volume flow can beshown by a gauge with 

very low air capacity or using a split signal relay be used 

to command extract air. 


controller with the command signal within the limits of 

V · min and V · max. The RLP 100 determines the required 

volume flow in accordance with the characteristic shown 

and compares this with the actual value. The damper 

actuator is controlled according to the deviation. The 

volume flow control is integral action. The controller 

RLP 100 is used with a specific Trox actuator. The controller 

is adjusted to the correct action of the damper 

(normally open/close) during factory calibration. 


Because of the weight of the membrane the position 

of the RLP 100 affects the measurement signal. The 

RLP 100 is normally calibrated for a vertical position of 

the membrane, i.e. pressure tube connections above or 

below horizontal plane. Other installation positions must 

be specified on order.




p 6 upper limit 


p 6 lower limit 

‡ maxM 

‡ minM 

Volume flow 

= 

= 

= 

= 

= 

‡ max 

‡ nom 

‡ max 

‡ nom 

‡ min 

‡ nom 

‡ min 

‡ nom 

‡ maxS 

‡ minS 

. 

. 

100 % 

100 % 

% of ‡ nom 

4 



pressure, which means that pressure fluctuations do not 

cause permanent volume flow changes. 

The hysteresis of the controller, coupled with measuring 

tolerances, produces a volume flow deviation shown 

opposite. 

If the conditions mentioned in the leaflet are not met, 

(e.g. lowest differential pressure, supply air conditions) 


Volume Flow Command Signal 

The control characteristic of the thermostat signal is limited 

by V · min at the bottom end and V · max at the top end. 

Thus control signals below the pressure corresponding to 

V · min (p6 lower limit) and above the V · max (p6 upper limit) do not 

lead to any volume flow changes. 


The V · max value corresponds to the volume flow which 

is set with a command signal greater p 6-upper limit (max. 

1 bar) or V · max override control. The setting range is from 

0 to 100 %. The percentage based on V · nom. 




set with a command signal lower p 6 lower limit or V · min override 

control. 


based on V · nom. V · min can be set to 0. To do this, the 

adjustment knob must be turned anti-clockwise beyond 

the 20 % stop by approximately one quarter turn until an 

audible click is heard. 

Slave Control 

The RLP 100 only provides for ratio control, i.e. the 



The volume flow ratio is set during factory calibration 

controller internally.


Adjustment Knobs 



V · min 

�p w-‡min 

�p w-‡max 

= 

= 

E 

V · max 

( 

( 

‡ min 

C 

‡ max 

C 

( 

( 

2 

2 

5 




using the V · min and V · max adjustment knobs on the 

RLP 100. Calculations are based on the formulae shown 

on page 4. 


• The adjustment knobs for V · min and V · max can be set 

within the given limits independently. V · min values lower 

20 % should not be set as the volume flow deviations 

increase. 

• A constant volume flow is set at the V · min adjustment 

knob. The V · max adjustment knob has to be at 100%. 

• If the V · min adjustment knob is set higher than V · max , 

the maximum volume flow is constantly controlled. 


Using the Effective Pressure 

The accuracy of the setting can be increased if the effective 

pressure signal Dp e is also measured with the 

system switched on. 

• Remove the tube from connection 6 (command signal) 

so that the controller runs at V · min. Do not seal the connecting 

nipple. 


• Tune V · min adjustment knob until the effective pressure 



stopped). 

• Close connection 6 with a cap or sealed tube. The 



• Proceed with the V · max setting as for V · min. 


The C values for the above calculations are given in the 




V · min V 

unit 

· min 

unit 

V · min V 

unit 

· to 

V 

min 

unit 

· to 

V nom 

· nom 

to 

V · to 

V nom 

· l/s m 

nom 

3 V 

/h 

· V H 

· N 

V · V H 

· 1) 

N 

1) 

1002) 10 50 15 75 36 180 54 270 

125 15 75 22 110 54 270 79 396 

160 25 125 40 190 90 450 144 684 

200 40 200 60 305 144 720 216 1098 

250 60 300 95 480 216 1080 342 1728 

315 105 525 155 780 378 1890 558 2808 

4003) 170 850 260 1300 612 3060 936 4680 

Size 


B x H 

mm 


l/s m 3 /h 

V · nom 

200 x 100 45 215 162 774 

300 x 100 65 320 234 1152 

400 x 100 85 425 306 1530 

500 x 100 105 535 378 1926 

600 x 100 130 650 468 2340 

200 x 200 85 415 306 1494 

300 x 200 125 620 450 2232 

400 x 200 165 825 594 2970 

500 x 200 205 1035 738 3726 

600 x 200 250 1250 900 4500 

700 x 200 290 1450 1044 5220 

800 x 200 330 1650 1188 5940 

300 x 300 185 920 666 3312 

400 x 300 245 1230 882 4428 

500 x 300 305 1535 1098 5526 

600 x 300 370 1850 1332 6660 

700 x 300 430 2150 1548 7740 

800 x 300 490 2450 1764 8820 

900 x 300 555 2770 1998 9972 

1000 x 300 620 3100 2232 11160 

400 x 400 325 1630 1170 5868 

500 x 400 410 2040 1476 7344 

600 x 400 490 2450 1764 8820 

700 x 400 570 2850 2052 10260 

800 x 400 650 3250 2340 11700 

900 x 400 735 3670 2646 13212 

1000 x 400 820 4100 2952 14760 

500 x 500 510 2540 1836 9144 

600 x 500 610 3050 2196 10980 

700 x 500 710 3550 2556 12780 

800 x 500 810 4050 2916 14580 

900 x 500 915 4570 3294 16452 

1000 x 500 1020 5100 3672 18360 

600 x 600 730 3650 2628 13140 

700 x 600 850 4250 3060 15300 

800 x 600 970 4850 3492 17460 

900 x 600 1100 5500 3960 19800 

1000 x 600 1220 6100 4392 21960 

700 x 700 990 4950 3564 17820 

800 x 700 1140 5700 4104 20520 

900 x 700 1280 6400 4608 23040 

1000 x 700 1420 7100 5112 25560 

800 x 800 1300 6500 4680 23400 

900 x 800 1460 7300 5256 26280 

1000 x 800 1620 8100 5832 29160 

900 x 900 1640 8200 5904 29520 

1000 x 900 1820 9100 6552 32760 

1000 x 1000 2020 10100 7272 36360 

1) V · min = 0 is also possible 2) Only TVR 3) Not for TVRK 

6 



V · nom



Volume flow 


100 5 5 

80 5 5 

60 5 6 

40 7 8 

20 10 11 

10 >11 

1) Only TVR 

2) Not for TVRK 


∆V · in ± % 


7 




Volume Flow Parameter 

Operating 

Mode 

E 

M 

S 

F 


V · min 

V · max 

TVR / 160 / 00 / PN1 / EN - 50 - 110 l/s 

TVZ-R / 160 / 00 / PR1 / MN - 50 - 110 l/s 

TVA-R / 160 / 00 / PN1 / SN - 50 - 110 l/s 


E Individual 

M Master 

S Slave 

F Fixed 

Volume Flow 

Range 

N Low 

(standard) 

H High 



V · min adjustment knob turned anticlockwise 

for 0 % setting 

V · max adjustment knob set at 100 % 

Volume flow ratio to master is adjusted 

internally 



V · max adjustment knob at 100 %


IMPORTANT 

8 7 2 1 6 





and tube sizing. 

PN 21, DW 

Volume flow 

PN 61, DW 

Volume flow 

V · nom 

V · max 

V · min 

V · (20%) 

V · nom 

V · max 

V · min 

V · (20%) 


6 

Control signal RT 2) 

0.2 0.6 1.0 bar 

1) Operation mode E, F and S: closed 

2) The room temperature controller must be connected 

on sequenzing relay 

8 

Nomenclature 



sensor 


sensor 

1 Operating pressure (1.3 bar, ± 0.1 bar) 

2 Output for actuator (0.2 to 1.0 bar) 

6 Input pressure for set volume flow (0.2 to 1.0 bar) 

M Output pressure for actual volume flow 

(0.2 to 1.0 bar) 


The differential pressure sensor of the terminal unit and 

the actuator are connected by tube to the volume flow 

controller in the factory. The operating pressure and the 

thermostat must be connected by the customer. Ensure 

that the operating compressed air meets the requirements 

in the Sauter documentation. It has to be considered 

that the operating pressure air must meet the requirements 

for conditioned instrument compressed air 


Control Sequences 

The adjustment signal of the room temperature controller 

can be divided into sequences if a water valve is to be 

controlled in addition to the volume flow. Adjustment to 

the pressure range of the thermostat is made by a 

sequencing relay. 

PN21, DW (direct action) 

Command signal 0.2 to 1.0 bar gives rise in volume flow. 

PN61, DW (direct action) 

Command signal 0.6 to 1.0 bar gives rise in volume flow. 

Fail Safe Direction of Actuator 

If the operating pressure fails or is disconnected, the 

actuator moves to a defined end position. This can be 

open or shut-off damper position. Selection of the fail 

safe direction allows system-specific safety requirements. 

NZ (normally closed): Damper closed with no pressure 

NO (normal open) : Damper open with no pressure



(PN 21, DW) 

Operating 

pressure 


RLP 100 


controller, 

DW 

RLP 100, Parallel Controller 

Room Temperature Control with Heating Sequence 

(PN 61, DW) 

Operating 

pressure 


RLP 100 




controller, 

DW 

1) Sequence relay contained in Trox scope of supply 

2) Restrictor by customer 

2) 

297510 

1) 


Heating valve 

0.2 bis 0.6 bar, NO 

9 

Room Thermostat 


to room thermostats according to the connection diagrams 

shown. The volume flow controllers release compressed 

air via the input connection. Thus the room thermostat 

can be connected with one line only. The room 

thermostat must have sufficient handling air capacity for 

the volume flow controller. If several volume flow controllers 

are connected to one room thermostat, the sum of 

the air capacities of all volume flow controllers must be 

taken into account. If this exceeds the maximum handling 

air capacity of the room thermostat, split signal 

relays must be used. If the line from the thermostat to the 

volume flow controller contains a split signal relay, a non 

venting thermostat can be used. 




If the terminal units are the same size and the V · min 

and V · max adjustment knobs are set at the same values, 



If several controllers are connected to aone room temperature 

controller, the sum of the air capacities of all volume 

flow controllers has to be considered. If this amount 

exceeds the maximum air capacity handling of the room 

temperature controller, split signal relays have to be 

used. 

External Operating Pressure Connections 

The volume flow controllers RLP 100 can be connected 

directly to the operating pressure supply as they have an 

internal restrictor. If the signal from the room thermostat 

is divided into several sequences and a sequencing relay 

connected, a supply pressure must be supplied to the 

thermostat. The correct sizing of the restrictor must take 

into account the heating valve actuator. Noise from the 

room thermostat will occur if the restrictor is too small.

Room Temperature Control with Shut Off Mode 

(PN 21, DW, NZ) 

Operating 

pressure 



S1 

RLP 100 

S1 System shut off switch 

S2 Window switch 

Operating 

pressure 



controller, 

DW 


297690 


controller, 

DW 

RLP 100, Supply Air 

Actuator 


1) 


RLP 100 , Extract Air 


S2 

10 

Shut Off Control 



the customer's pneumatic switches. The override control 

for full shut off can take place on all or separate terminat 

units. A break in the pressure line to the controlter or 

actuator leads to closure of the damper when fail safe 

direction of action is normally closed. With this override 

control, and unit type TVZ/ TVA/TVR full shut off leakage 

air volume flows to DIN 1946 part 4 are achieved. With 

TVM units, note that the override control must be 

switched to both controllers. 

S1, S2 closed: Room temperature control mode 

S1 or S2 open: Override control 

Safety Function “Damper Open” 

If, for safety reasons, ventilation must be guaranteed for 

certain building sections, actuators with fail safe direction 

normally open (open under no pressure) must be used. In 

the event of failure of the compressed air supply, the 

damper always opens. 


Supply air/extract air slave control is possible using the 

actual value of the supply air as a control signal for the 

control of extract air, if RLP 100 is used for supply air and 

a second volume flow controller for the extract air. Only 

ratio control can be achieved, i.e. supply and extract air 

must remain in the same ratio. 

The separating relay in the control line is factory-fitted a 

short distance from the supply air controller. It must not 

be moved. If the extract air volume flow is reduced to 0, 

an RLP100 must be used. The volume flow ratio may be 

less than or greater than 100 % and is factory-set using 

an adjustment screw in the controller. The V · max adjustment 

knob is set to 100 %, the V · min adjustment knob 

to 0 %.


Function Test 





Check operating pressure 

Override control V · min 


Override control V · max 




yes 


and closing? 

yes 


yes 


yes 


control? 

yes 


no 

no 

no 

no 

no 

no 


Check pressure 

Damper blocked? Fail 

safe direction OK? 


Duct pressure 

sufficient? 

Measurement 


damaged? 

Check room 

thermostat 

Check window 



preset for TVZ 125, 30 ... 60 l/s, V H -Range, 

PN21, DW, NZ 

11 

Commissioning 

A rapid function test for commissioning can be carried 

out with the system running and the operating pressure 

present. Remove the tube from the connection to the 

operating pressure supply. If compressed air escapes 

from the line, this shows that the controller is supplied 

with compressed air. After replacing the tube, the actuator 

must return to approximately the same position it held 

before the test. If commissioning involves proving the 

limit volume flows V · min and V · max hese must be set as 

described below. 

For each operating situation, the effective pressure (∆p w) 

is measured at the Trox differential pressure sensor and 

the volume flow calculated: 

V · actual = C . �p w 

In many cases, incorrect tube connections or insufficient 

operating pressure are the cause of the faults. Therefore 

for a detailed test on each volume flow controller, first 

remove the signal from the room thermostat and then 

measure the operating pressure. 

Remove the high pressure and low pressure lines on the 

volume flow controller and connect a manometer. The 

actuator must open and the effective pressure (∆p e) must 

rise. 

Reconnect the high pressure line, the actuator must now 

close and the effective pressure must fall. 

Connect the low pressure line. The controller must control 

to V · min. Measure effective pressure, calculate volume 

flow and compare with designed value. 

Close off connection 6 for room thermostat. The controller 

must control to V · max. Repeat measurement for V · max 

as described above. 

Measure control signal p 6 and connect. 

Calculate set volume flow and compare with actual 

volume flow. 

Activate override controls and check operation. 


To replace faulty controllers, only controllers set for the 

terminal unit type and size must be used. Unadjusted 

controllers are only acceptable as a temporary solution. 

When ordering spare controllers, state V · min and V · max.

Sauter RLP 100, Room Pressure Control 

1 

Contents 

Subject Page 




Room Pressure Adjustment on Site 5 


Order Code, Examples Single-Duct Units 7 


Room Temperature and Room Pressure Control 9 



RLP 100 F901/F915 

� 

� 

RLP 100 F003/F004 

� 

� 

� Controller RLP 100... 

� x p adjustment knob, % 

� ∆ p adjustment knob 


Type Range 


� 

� 

� 


� �V · adjustment knob 

� T n adjustment knob 


Characteristic Controller 


–20 to +20 Pa 

–50 to +50 Pa 


Actuator Normally Open (NO) 

Actuator Normally Closed (NZ) 

� 

� 

� 

RLP 100 F901 

RLP 100 F915 

RLP 100 F004 

RLP 100 F003 

2 


The pneumatic Sauter RLP 100 room pressure controller 

has been designed for the high or low pressure control of 

dense rooms. The room pressure is controlled using the 

master-and-slave system (cascade-controlled) by a 

Sauter RLP 100 F003/F004 flow volume controller, which 

controls the flow volume control unit in supply air or 

extract air. In total the control for 1 room comprises 

3 controllers: 



solved with the supply/extract air slave control, as measuring 

and control tolerances as well as the unknown 

density degree of the room may lead to undesirably high 

room pressures or to room pressures with wrong signs. 

With the room pressure controller the differential pressure 

as to a reference room is measured and controlled. The 

set volume flow of the slave controller is within a limited 

range in addition to the master controller influenced by 

the room pressure controller. 

Volume Flow Controller 1 

For the variable volume flow control with V · min and V · max 

limitation serves the volume flow controller 1 in connection 

with a suitable room temperature controller. 


Volume flow controller 2 operates in parallel to volume 

flow controller 1 and also receives the signal from the 

room temperature controller. As a second command variable 

the output signal of the room pressure controller is 

switched on (activated). 

The volume flow controllers RLP100 F001/F002 are 

explained in detail in a separate Trox product information 

(EØ16NH1). 

The actual values of room pressure and volume flows are 

available as linear pneumatic standard signals and can 

be used for indication. 



transducer. Therefore the RLP ... is suitable for the 




IMPORTANT 




concerned.


Characteristic Actual Value 


Room pressure 

difference 

0 

0 0.6 

Actual value signal P M 

Characteristic Actual Value 


V · nom 

Volume flow 

V · min unit 

0 

0 Actual value signal PM Characteristic of Set-Point Adjustment 


V · nom 

Volume flow 

controller 2 

+ 

- 

V · actual = P M . V · nom 

V · 2 = V · 1 + . V · P8 - 0.6 

nom 

4 

�V · 

0 0 Volume flow controller 1 

1.0 bar 

1.0 bar 

V · nom 

3 



The room pressure1) is measured on the static differential 

pressure principle. One measuring point each for static 

pressure is provided in the room to be controlled and in 

the reference room. If several rooms are switched one 

behind the other in pressure cascade, a neutral reference 

pressure is recommended, i.e. corridor, which must be 

free from wind influence and other pressure fluctuations. 

These pressures (room pressure differentials) are measured 

by a membrane pressure transducer. The actual 

room pressure value is available as pneumatic signal PM. The set room pressure is adjusted or predetermined by 

an external command variable. The controller compares 

the required room pressure with the actual value. Corresponding 

to the control deviation the influence onto the 

volume flow controller 2 is changed. The room pressure 

control shows PI behaviour. 



pressure principle. For further explanations please refer 

to the separate Trox product information EØ16NH1. 

The set volume flow is predetermined by the room temperature 

controller and limited to V · min and V · max. The 

second command variable (for room pressure controller) 

results in a further adjustment of the set value. The controller 

determines the required volume flow according to 

the characteristics as shown and compares this with the 

actual value. 

The damper actuator is controlled according to the control 

deviation. The volume flow control shows I-behaviour. 

The volume flow controllers are used together with a 

certain type of Trox actuators. Adaptation to the fail safe 

direction of the adjustment blade (NZ/NO) inside the controller 

is made in the factory. 







order. 

1) For simplification the room pressure differential is referred to as 

room pressure in this leaflet.

Control Behaviour after Alteration of Disturbance 


Pressure 

difference 

Room pressure 

difference 

0 

1000 

Pa 

800 

600 

400 

200 

Door open 



V · min 

= 

= 

Door closed 

�V · 

Time 

% of V 

Volume flow 

· 20 40 60 80 100 

nom 

Formula for Volume Flow Adjustment 

‡ max 

‡ nom 

‡ min 

‡ nom 

. 

. 


�V · 

V · max 

100 % 

100 % 

4 


As the room pressure controller works with PI characteristic 

(proportional-integral) the required room pressure is 

theoretically always obtained. Deviations are only given 

by the measuring tolerance of the room pressure transducer 

(component in RLP 100...). It is, however, a prerequisite 

that the room has the density required, in order to 

achieve the required room pressure from the volume flow 

differential between between supply air and extract air. 

The room pressure height, which results from alterations 

of disturbances (door closed) as well as the setting (stabilization) 

time required depends i.a. on the duct pressures 

in the supply and extract air system, room density 

and air change (rate) (volume flow / contents). 



duct pressure, i.e. pressure fluctuations cause no 




move. 

This dead zone and the accuracy of site measurements 

lead to volume flow deviation ∆V · shown opposite. 




Room Pressure Adjustment 

The required room pressure is adjusted at the Dp adjustment 

knob. The adjustment range reaches from –20 to 

+20 Pa and/or –50 to +50Pa. 

If the room pressure is variable, e. g. changeover high/low 

pressure, the adjustment knob must be set to –20 Pa 

(and/or –50 Pa). If necessary, the lower pressure value 

can be limited. 

Adjustment Volume Flow Controller 2 

The ∆V · -adjustment knob at volume flow controller 2 must 

be set to 0 % in order to obtain an unobjectionable functioning 

of room pressure control. The adjustments of V · min 

and V · max must be in conformity with the values of controller 

1. 



Please, consult Trox in case of deviations.


Adjustment Knobs RLP 100 


� 

Adjustment Knobs RLP 100 


� 



x p 

� x p adjustment knob, % 

� ∆ p adjustment knob 

� T n adjustment knob 


�p w-‡min 

�p w-‡max 

T n 

� p 

= 

= 

( 

( 

‡ min 

C 

‡ max 

C 

( 

( 

2 

2 

� 

� 

� 

� 


� �V · adjustment knob 

5 

Room Pressure Adjustment on Site 

A subsequent adjustment of the room pressure set value 

can be made at the ∆ p adjustment knob of the RLP 100. 

Non Air Tight Room 

Should at commissioning it turn out that the required 

room pressure cannot be achieved, because the room 

has not the projected density, a supply air/extract air 

slave control has to be adjusted. 

For this purpose the room pressure controller is put out 

of force leaving connection 8 of the slave controller open. 

The ∆V · adjustment knob is set to 10 %. Thus the extract 

air follows the supply air in a ratio 1 : 1. 


• The adjustment knobs for V · min and V · max can within the 

indicated limits be adjusted independently from each 

other. An adjustment of less than 20 % cannot be 

recommended, because of the reduced control accuracy. 

• If the V · min adjustment knob is set higher than V · max, 

then the maximum volume flow V · max is constantly controlled. 

• A constant volume flow (fixed value) is adjusted using 

the V · min adjustment knob; the V · max adjustment knob 

must be set at 100 %. 


lf subsequent changes to the volume flow limit values are 

required, the setting knobs can be reset to the new 

values using the rules above. The accuracy can be increased 

if the effective pressures of the differential pressure 

sensor can be measured and the following procedure 

carried out with the system switched on: 

• Remove the tube from connection 6 (control signal) so 

that the controller runs at V · min. Do not seal the connecting 

nipple. 


• Set V · min adjustment knob until the effective pressure 



stopped). 

• Close connection 6 with a cap or sealed hose. The 



• Reset the V · max adjustment knob as described for V · min. 


The C values for the above calcolations are given in the 




V · min- V 

unit 

· minunit 

V · min- V 

unit 

· to 

V 

minunit 

· to 

V nom 

· nom 

to 

V · to 

V nom 

· l/s m 

nom 

3 V 

/h 

· V H 

· N 

V · V H 

· 1) 

N 

1) 

1002) 10 50 15 75 36 180 54 270 

125 15 75 22 110 54 270 79 396 

160 25 125 40 190 90 450 144 684 

200 40 200 60 305 144 720 216 1098 

250 60 300 95 480 216 1080 342 1728 

315 105 525 155 780 378 1890 558 2808 

4003) 170 850 260 1300 612 3060 936 4680 

Size 


B x H 

mm 


l/s m 3 /h 

V · nom 

200 x 100 45 215 162 774 

300 x 100 65 320 234 1152 

400 x 100 85 425 306 1530 

500 x 100 105 535 378 1926 

600 x 100 130 650 468 2340 

200 x 200 85 415 306 1494 

300 x 200 125 620 450 2232 

400 x 200 165 825 594 2970 

500 x 200 205 1035 738 3726 

600 x 200 250 1250 900 4500 

700 x 200 290 1450 1044 5220 

800 x 200 330 1650 1188 5940 

300 x 300 185 920 666 3312 

400 x 300 245 1230 882 4428 

500 x 300 305 1535 1098 5526 

600 x 300 370 1850 1332 6660 

700 x 300 430 2150 1548 7740 

800 x 300 490 2450 1764 8820 

900 x 300 555 2770 1998 9972 

1000 x 300 620 3100 2232 11160 

400 x 400 325 1630 1170 5868 

500 x 400 410 2040 1476 7344 

600 x 400 490 2450 1764 8820 

700 x 400 570 2850 2052 10260 

800 x 400 650 3250 2340 11700 

900 x 400 735 3670 2646 13212 

1000 x 400 820 4100 2952 14760 

500 x 500 510 2540 1836 9144 

600 x 500 610 3050 2196 10980 

700 x 500 710 3550 2556 12780 

800 x 500 810 4050 2916 14580 

900 x 500 915 4570 3294 16452 

1000 x 500 1020 5100 3672 18360 

600 x 600 730 3650 2628 13140 

700 x 600 850 4250 3060 15300 

800 x 600 970 4850 3492 17460 

900 x 600 1100 5500 3960 19800 

1000 x 600 1220 6100 4392 21960 

700 x 700 990 4950 3564 17820 

800 x 700 1140 5700 4104 20520 

900 x 700 1280 6400 4608 23040 

1000 x 700 1420 7100 5112 25560 

800 x 800 1300 6500 4680 23400 

900 x 800 1460 7300 5256 26280 

1000 x 800 1620 8100 5832 29160 

900 x 900 1640 8200 5904 29520 

1000 x 900 1820 9100 6552 32760 

1000 x 1000 2020 10100 7272 36360 

1) V · min = 0 is also possible 2) Only TVR 3) Not TVRK 


6 


V · nom



Volume flow 


100 5 5 

80 5 5 

60 5 6 

40 7 8 

20 10 11 

10 >11 


∆V · in ± % 


7 





Operating 

Mode 

E 

F 

V · min 


V · max 

TVR / 160 / 00 / PN1 / ZE - 50 - 110 l/s - +10Pa 

TVA / 160 / 00 / PX1 / AE - 50 - 110 l/s - -25Pa 

TVR / 160 / 00 / PV1 / ZF - 75 l/s - -10Pa 

Installation point 

A Extract Air 

Z Supply Air 


E Individual 

F Fixed 



Please, consult Trox in case of deviations. 

Room Pressure Parameters 

�p set at required room pressure 



V · min adjustment knob set at required V · 

V · max adjustment knob set at 100 %. 

�p

Tube Connections RLP 100 F901/F915 

Tube Connections RLP 100 F003/F004 

IMPORTANT 








Reference 

Room 

6 

1 

M 

2 

7 

8 

6 

1 

M 

2 

7 

8 

Room 


8 

Nomenclature 


+ Static pressure input from room 

- Static pressure input from reference room 


2 Output set value (0.2 to 1.0 bar) 

6 Input room pressure set value (0.2 to1.0 bar) 

M Output actual room pressure (0.2 to 1.0 bar) 



sensor 


sensor 


2 Actuator output (0.2 to 1,0 bar) 

6 Set volume flow input (0.2 to 1.0 bar) 

8 Input set value (0.2 to 1.0 bar) 

M Output actual value (0.2 to 1.0 bar) 


The differential pressure sensor of the volume flow control 

unit and the actuator are tube-connected with the 

volume flow controller in the factory. The operating pressure 

has to be connected by the customer. It has to be 

considered that the operating pressure air must meet the 

requirements for conditioned instrument compressed air 


Tube Connections Room Pressure Controller 

Tube dimensions: di = 6 mm 

max. lengths : 10 m (plus and minus in total) 1) 


For room pressure controls the RLP 100 is tube-connected 

according to the sketch shown. The measuring 

points in the room and reference room must be free from 

any turbulences (no influence due to room flow, no dynamic 

share pd). Note: 

If room groups with different pressure stages are arranged 

one behind the other, all transducers shall operate 

with a common reference pressure, e.g. atmospheric 

pressure. 

1) Recommendation


Room Temperature and Room Pressure Control 

Operating 

pressure 

Room 

temperature 

controller, DW 

1 6 

RLP 100 (F001/002) 

Operating Mode E 

1 2 

RLP 100 Room Pressure 

1 8 6 

RLP 100 Volume Flow 

Room Pressure Control (Constant Value) 

Operating 

pressure 

RLP 100 Room Pressure 

RLP 100 Volume Flow 

Operating Mode ZE, AE 

8 

Room 

Reference room 

Room 

Reference room 

2 

Operating Mode ZF, AF 

9 

Room Temperature Controller 


with discharging room temperature controllers according 

to the tubing plans shown. The volume flow controllers 

discharge (blow) compressed air through the input for the 

command variable. Thus, the controller can be connected 

with one connection tube only. The room temperature 

controller must be dimensioned for the discharge 

volume of the volume flow controller. 


The room pressure controller should be assembled close 

to the room and/or reference room in order to keep the 

tube lengths of the measurement lines short. 


Several volume flow controllers (supply and extract air) 

are parallelly controlled by one room temperature controller. 

The volume flow control units are of equal size and 

the V · min and V · max adjustment knobs are set to equal 

values. For this reason all units have the same volume 

flow. 

If several controllers are connected to a room temperature 

controller, the sum of the discharge amounts of all 

volume flow controllers has to be considered. If this 

amount exceeds the maximum air take-back volume of 

the room temperature controller, cutoff relays have to be 

used. 

Operating Pressure Connections 

The volume flow controllers RLP 100 can directly be connected 

to the operating pressure supply as they have an 

internal restrictor. If the signal of the room temperature 

controller is subdivided to several sequences and a 

sequence relay is integrated, an operating pressure supply 

must be directed to the room temperature controller. 

Here, the correct dimensioning of the restrictor has to be 

taken into account, also under consideration of the heating 

value actuator. If the restriction is too low, disturbing 

discharge noises occur at the room temperature controller. 


Rooms with constant volume flow can be room-pressure 

controlled. If a constant controller (e.g. Trox RN) is installed 

in the supply air, the room pressure volume flow 

cascade has to be in the extract air. This controller compensates 

room pressure deviations resulting from supply 

air tolerances. At constant room extract air the same procedure 

is used for the supply air.

Function Test 





Check Volume Flow Controller 

Check Room Pressure Controller 



yes 


and closing? 

yes 

Volume Flow V · min ? 

yes 

Volume Flow V · max ? 

yes 


control? 

yes 


no 

no 

no 

no 

no 

no 



Operating pressure 

due to Sauter 

requirements? 

Damper blocked? Fail 

safe direction OK? 


Duct pressure 

sufficient? 

Measurement 


damaged? 

Check room 

thermostat 

Check window 


Room Pressure Controller Sauter RLP 100 F 901 

preset at +15 Pa 

Volume Flow Controller Sauter RLP 100 F 003 

preset for TVA 160 

10 

Commissioning 

For commissioning it is best to first disconnect (remove) 

the command variable of the room pressure controller 

(terminal 8). With the doors open, master and slave controller 

are set in operation according to Trox product 

information (RLE 150, EØ16MB7). Then reconnect command 

variable, shut the doors and check room pressure 

(smoke checks). 

The set value of the room pressure is reached, when the 

room pressure determined from the P M measured is in 

conformity with the set value. If this is not the case, the 

room leakage is too high. The set value has to be reduced. 

If the room proves to be non-air-tight, the room 

pressure control cannot function. The room is then to be 

taken into operation with the supply air/extract air slave 

control. 





solution. The following must be specified when ordering 

a replacement controller: Room presure, V · min and V · max.

Sauter Accessories 

1 

Contents 

Subject Page 

Sequencing Relay 2 

Split Signal Relay 2 


Sequencing Relay 297510 

� 

� Adjustment screw 

� Output 

� Input 

Characteristic Diagram 

P output 

Split Signal Relay 

Characteristic Diagram 

P output 

� 

� 

1.0 

bar 

0.6 

0.2 

� Free 

� Output 

� Input 

1.0 

bar 

0.6 

0.2 

0.2 

0.2 

0.6 

P input 

0.6 

P input 

3 

1 

2 

bar 

bar 

297510 

1.0 

297690 

1.0 

1 

3 

2 

2 

3 

2 

Sequencing Relay 


The Sauter 297510 sequencing relay is used in connection 

with variable volume flow controllers if a split range 

of the output signal from the room thermostat is to be 

used to control a heating valve in sequence with the variable 

volume. The room thermostat must give a rise in 

pressure signal as the temperature rises (direct acting on 

cooling). 

Function 

The full range of pressure sigoal on the room thermostat 

of 0.2 to 1.0 bar is set on the input of the sequence relay. 

From 0.6 bar input pressure, a double amplified signal is 

present at the output according to the diagram shown. 

The input is non venting. The room thermostat must be 

supplied with operating pressure via an external restrictor. 

The output is fed from the volume flow controller. 

Split Signal Relay 

Sauter Accessories 


A split signal relay is used to separate pneumatic signals. 

In the control of variable volume flows, the signal is used 

for supply/extract air sequential control. The actual volume 

flow value output of the RLP 10 can only supply a 

limited amount of air. The relay serves as an amplifier: 

another application is the parallel switching of several 

VAV terminal units on one room temperature controller. If 

the capacity of the room temperature controller is exceeded, 

the relay is used to create control subgroups. 

Function 

The control pressure is always transferred from the input 

to the output in the ratio of 1:1. There is no air release 

from the input. A ball relief nozzle releases excess pressure 

on the output side. The maximum air handling capacity 

must be taken into account.

Trox Pneumatic Actuator 

1 

Contents 

Subject Page 

Application 2 

Function 2 

Design changes reserved · All rights reserved · ® Gebrüder Trox GmbH (12/2001) · Leaflet No. E016MJ0

Pneumatic Actuator 

2 

1 

� Actuator 

� Piston rod 

� Air pressure connection 

3 

2 

Application 

Trox Pneumatic Actuator 

Maintenance-free compressed air damper actuator for 

VAV terminal units. Controlled by the signal of a pneumatic 

volume flow controller. The actuator is factorymounted 

on the terminal unit with pneumatic tubing to 

the controller. 

Function 

The actuator incorporates a neoprene roll membrane and 

thus has no steady state air consumption itself. As the 

control pressure rises, the piston rod pushes against a 

return spring (stroke approximately 85 mm). 

At control pressure 0 bar the piston rod is retracted. The 

piston rod drives the damper via a lever. The mechanism 

is factory set such that the full travel of the aetuator is 

used for the open to closed movement of the damper. No 

travel limiters are required. The direction of action (open 

or closed with no pressure) is established by the actuator 

mounting position. 

• Manual adjustment is not possible. Manual withdrawal 

of the piston rod can lead to damage. The roll membrane 

is not under pressure and can stick internally.

Belimo VRD2 - TROX

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

Delete template?

Save as template?